Waterville Opera House

Transcription

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
Project No. HTF 2015-10
Structural Stone Repairs
202 E. Front Street
Waterville, KS 66548
This project is partially funded by a Heritage Trust Fund Grant
through the Kansas State Historical Society
SPECIFICATIONS:
202 E. Front Street
ARCHITECT:
Bruce McMillan AIA, Architects, P.A.
555 Poyntz Avenue, Suite #295
Manhattan, Kansas 66502
(785) 776-1011
FAX (785) 776-9785
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:
VMT Engineering
2847 5th Rd.
Waterville, Kansas 66548
(785) 313-6774
Specification Date: December, 2015
Project No. 15.05
INDEX
●
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
●
CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT
AIA DOCUMENT A305
●
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
AIA DOCUMENT A701
●
PROPOSAL
P-1 - P-3
●
REQUEST FOR PROJECT EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
R-1 - R-2
●
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
FOR CONSTRUCTION - AIA DOCUMENT A201
●
INDEX TO SPECIFICATIONS
N-1 - N-2
1-6
1 - 10
1 - 38
I-1 - I-2
(to be submitted with bid)
City of Waterville, KS
136 East Commercial St.
Waterville,KS 66548
Bruce McMillan AIA Architects, P.A.
555 Poyntz Avenue
Suite 295
Manhattan, KS 66502
ARTICLE 9
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
9.1
The proposal form shall be filled out in full. Proposals for less than all the work will not be
considered except if the work is divided into two or more parts, in which case each part covered
by the bid shall be filled out in full. Extensions and totals submitted in the bid will be subject to
audit and verification; unit prices shall govern in event of discrepancies between unit prices and
extensions or totals. Each proposal shall bear the bidder’s name and exact post office address.
Any person(s) signing as an agent shall submit acceptable evidence of his authority.
9.2
Each bidder shall submit with his proposal a certified check, cashier’s check on a solvent bank, or
acceptable bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total bid shown on the proposal.
This security shall be made payable to the Owner and will serve as a guarantee that he will file all
bonds and securities required and enter into any contract awarded him, in accordance with the
terms of his bid, within ten (10) days after certification of award. Should the successful bidder
fail to enter into a contract with the Owner, said bid security shall be forfeited as liquidated
damages and the money derived therefrom will be turned over to the use of the Owner. No
bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of thirty (30) days after the date of the bid opening.
9.3
The bidder to whom the contract is awarded will be required to furnish acceptable Performance
and Statutory Bonds, each in the amount of the total contract price, in conformity with the
requirements of the contract documents.
9.4
Each bidder shall acquaint himself with all conditions pertaining to the proposed work, and shall
personally examine the site. Any prospective bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part
of the contract documents may submit to the Architect a written request for an interpretation
thereof. Official interpretation, modification, or revision of the contract documents will be made
only by Addendum, duly issued and mailed or delivered to each party having a set of contract
documents. The architect assumes no liability for any other explanations or interpretations of the
documents.
9.5
Bids shall be based on materials and equipment fully complying with the drawings and
specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible, under his contract price or prices, for
furnishing and installing materials and equipment conforming to the stipulated requirements, even
though he names in his proposal other kinds or types of materials and equipment.
9.6
Before award of the contract, the successful bidder will be required to satisfy the Owner as to his
experience and competence to construct the work; his integrity and reliability in carrying out the
provisions of his performance bond; and his resources for the vigorous prosecution of the work.
9.7
Bidders are requested to be present at the opening of bids. All proposals shall be made and
received with the express understanding that the bidder accepts the terms and conditions set forth
in those instructions and the standard specifications, contract, and bond forms. No bidder shall be
interested in more than one bid. Collusion among bidders or the submission of more than one bid
under different names shall be cause for rejection of all such bids without consideration.
9.8
The right is reserved by the Owner to reject any or all bids, to waive any irregularities therein,
and to determine which is the lowest responsible bid most suitable to them and to award the
contract on that basis.
9
9.9
The deposit check for plans of the successful bidder will be retained and he will be furnished with
additional sets of plans and specifications upon return of such sets by unsuccessful bidders. If
further additional sets are needed, they will be sold to him at cost. Unsuccessful bidders shall
receive a full refund of the deposit if the plans are returned in good condition within ten (10) days
after award of the contract and a bid has been submitted by those parties intending to do so.
9.10
It is anticipated that work under this contract will not commence until the actual delivery of
materials and equipment at the site. The successful bidder shall order promptly all required
materials and arrange for all construction equipment necessary, and shall vigorously prosecute the
work to completion as rapidly as possible. If said work is not prosecuted with due diligence, the
contract may be terminated by the Owner as set forth under Article 14 of the General Conditions.
9.11
The time of completion being an essential part of this contract, the Contractor will use all
diligence to complete the project within the time specified on the proposal sheet. The Contractor
will reimburse the Owner for the subsequent expense of supervision and inspection at the rate of
two hundred fifty dollars ($250) per day for each additional calendar day in event the work to be
performed under this contract is not completed within the time specified on the proposal sheet.
The time for completion shall be extended for a period equivalent to the time lost because of
inclement weather, the non-delivery of properly ordered materials, or other causes over which the
Contractor has no control. The Architect shall determine the period of extension, if any, and his
decision shall be final and binding upon both parties.
9.12
The General Contractor who is the apparent low bidder shall submit to the Architect a typewritten
list of all Sub-Contractors and material suppliers to be used on this project within two (2) hours
after bids are opened. This list shall be reviewed by the Architect and Owner for approval in
accordance with the General Conditions.
10
PROPOSAL
TO:
City of Waterville, KS.
Hereinafter called the Owner
The undersigned (hereinafter called the Bidder) proposes to complete (Project No. HTF 2015-10 Structural
Stone Repairs, Waterville Opera House, 202 E. Front Street, Waterville, KS 66548) (hereinafter called the
Project) and to furnish all other materials, machinery, tools, equipment, labor, transportation and other means
required to complete the project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and by this reference made a
part thereof, prepared by Bruce McMillan AIA, Architects, P.A. (hereinafter called the Architect) and dated
December, 2015.
The Bidder has made careful examination of the area in which the project is to be completed, has become
informed as to the kind of facilities required before and during the completion of the Project, and has become
acquainted with the labor conditions which would affect the work.
The Bidder agrees that if his bid is accepted, the terms and conditions set out in these Contract Documents
shall govern.
ARTICLE I. BID PRICE
The Bidder will complete the Project for the following Base Bid:
Dollars ($
(In case of discrepancy between words and figures, written words will govern.)
).
Alternate No. 1: The Contractor will complete all work shown and specified for repair of the south façade of
the building for the following amount.
Dollars ($
).
Alternate No. 2: The Contractor will complete all work shown and specified for repair of the +/- 100 sq. ft.
area on the east wall for the following amount.
Dollars ($
).
Unit Price No. 1: The Contractor will provide and install new stone above the base bid allowance amount for
the following amount.
Dollars ($
). S.F.
Unit Price No. 2: The Contractor will provide additional tuckpointing beyond the base bid allowance amount
for the following amount.
Dollars ($
). Lin. ft.
ARTICLE II. TIME OF COMPLETION
The Bidder will commence construction of the project within ten calendar days after receipt of the Notice to
Proceed and proposes to complete the Project within
calendar days, unless the period for
completion is extended in accordance with the methods provided therefore in the construction contract.
P-1
ARTICLE III. PERFORMANCE AND STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
The undersigned bidder agrees to execute the contract and furnish performance bonds and statutory payment
bonds (State of Kansas), for the amount of the total of this bid and evidence that the insurance of the types
and minimum limits specified has been obtained within five (5) calendar days from the date when the written
notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at the address given on this proposal. The name and
address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and
payment bonds is as follows:
NAME OF SURETY:
ADDRESS OF SURETY:
The undersigned bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without
collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding for the same work, and that it is made in
pursuance of the subject to all the terms and conditions of the Notice to Bidders, the Instructions to Bidders,
the Construction Contract, the Detailed Specifications, the Plans, and any Special Conditions and addenda
pertaining to the work to be done, all which have been examined by the undersigned.
ARTICLE IV. CONTRACT OR BID REJECTION
The undersigned understands that his competence, experience, responsibility, and time of completion, as well
as any other factors of interest to the Owner, will be consideration in making the award. The Owner reserves
the right to reject any or all bids, to accept or reject alternate bids and unit prices and to waive any informality
or irregularity concerning the bids received as it may be in his interest to do so.
Respectfully submitted,
Name of Bidder
By
Title
Business Address
ATTEST:
Secretary
SEAL
(If bid is by a Corporation)
P-2
Bidders are required to acknowledge receipt of all addenda. Indicate below any or all such Addenda received.
Addendum No. 1.
2.
3.
4.
P-3
REQUEST FOR PROJECT EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
Kansas Department of Revenue
Office of Policy and Research
915 SW Harrison St., Room 230
Topeka, KS 66612-1588
Date________________________
Telephone: (785) 296-3081
Fax: (785) 296-7928
It is requested that a Certificate of Exemption be issued to the Petitioning Authority for the following described project if it is
determined by the Department of Revenue that the proposed project qualifies for exemption from sales tax under the provisions
of K.S.A. 79-3606(d) – public or private nonprofit hospital, elementary or secondary school, educational institution & political
subdivisions of the state of Kansas; K.S.A. 79-3606(e) – United States Government, its agencies or instrumentalities; K.S.A.
79-3606(xx) – 501(c)(3) nonprofit zoo; K.S.A. 79-3606(aaa) – 501(c)(3) religious organization; K.S.A. 79-3606(ccc) – 501(c)(3)
primary care clinic; K.S.A. 79-3606 (iii) non-profit food distribution center; K.S.A. 79-3606 (qqq) TLC for Children and Families,
Inc.; K.S.A. 79-3606 (sss) non-profit charitable family providers; K.S.A. 79-3606 (ttt) museum within a designated qualified
hometown or K.S.A.(uuu) Kansas Children’s Service League.
(A)
Opera House Repairs
Type of project: ______________________________________________________________________________
Describe work to be done
Opera House
A. Present use of facility: ______________________________________________________________________
Same
B. Proposed use of facility after project: ___________________________________________________________
(B)
202 E. Front Street, Waterville, KS 66548
Project location: ______________________________________________________________________________
Building Number, Street Address, City, State, and Zip Code
(C)
Is this project being constructed as part of a business enterprise whose sales are subject to sales tax (e.g., municipal
✔
water, electric or gas companies)?
Yes

No
(D)
Is the Petitioning Authority authorized to levy ad valorem taxes on tangible property?
(E)
A. Is this project being totally financed by industrial revenue bonds?
B. Is this project being partially financed by industrial revenue bonds?
Yes
Yes
Yes
✔
No
No
✔

No
✔
N/A
Amount of bonds being issued for project: _________________________________________________________
If you answered “Yes” to A or B, you must complete the agreement on the back of this form and attach a copy of the
letter of intent or resolution of intent to issue bonds.
If you answered “No” to A or B, how is the project being financed (explain type of tax, bonds, etc.)?
Kansas Heritage Trust Fund Grant and private contributions.
___________________________________________________________________________________________
(F)
Name of claimant owner of project: _______________________________________________________________
(G) Starting date: ___________________________
(H)
Estimated completion date: _________________
( I )
Estimated project cost: ___________________
(J)
List names and addresses of prime contractors:
(K)
Contract date: __________________________
(L)
Contract number: ________________________
(M) Project number: _________________________
______________________________________________
____________________________________________
Petitioning Authority
Mailing Address
______________________________________________
____________________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
City, State & Zip Code
______________________________________________
_________________________
Type or Print Name
Title
PR-76 (Rev. 7/06)
Tax Exempt Entity No.
________________
Phone Number
136 East Commercial St.
Bruce McMillan AIA Architects, P.A.
555 Poyntz Avenue
Suite 295
Manhattan, KS 66502
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
0-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
0-2
SCOPE OF THE WORK
0-3
LOCATION OF THE PROJECT
0-4
PARTIES INVOLVED IN THE PROJECT
0-5
INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTOR
0-6
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
0-7
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
0-8
BOND AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
0-9
GUARANTEE
0-10
EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS
0-11
COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION
0-12
DEMOLITION
0-13
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - SUPPLEMENTAL
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF WORK
DRAWINGS
SHOP DRAWINGS
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT
TESTS OF MATERIALS
APPROPRIATE MATERIALS AND INSTALLATIONS
RECEIVING AND STORING MATERIALS
PREPARATION
INSTALLATIONS
CLOSING-IN-WORK
FINISHING
REPAIRS
COMPLETED WORK
WARRANTIES AND LIEN WAIVERS
REQUIRED SHOP DRAWINGS, MATERIALS, SAMPLES AND TEST
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
SUMMARY
012100
ALLOWANCES
012200
UNIT PRICES
012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
014200
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300
EXECUTION
017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
I-1
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE (NOT USED)
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
040120
BRICK MASONRY REPAIR
040120.63 BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING
040140.61 STONE REPAIR
040140.62 STONE REPOINTING
044313.16 ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
DIVISION 05 – METALS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
064800
WOOD FRAMES
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
079200
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092900
GYPSUM BOARD
099113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
10
11
12
13
14
21
22
23
26
27
28
– SPECIALTIES (NOT USED)
- EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
– FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
- CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED)
- FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT USED)
– PLUMBING (NOT USED)
- HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (NOT USED)
– ELECTRICAL (NOT USED)
- COMMUNICATIONS (NOT USED)
- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
312000
EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES (NOT USED)
I-2
WATERVILLE OPERA HOUSE STRUCTURAL STONE REPAIRS
HTF 2015-10/15.05
0.1 General Conditions
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A 201, 1997 Edition, Articles 1–14,
inclusive are part of this Specification and are bound herein.
0.2 Scope of the Work
Contractor is to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and fees necessary to complete this project in
accordance with the plans and specifications. All work is to be done by first class mechanics in a
workmanlike manner. Contractor shall be thoroughly familiar with the conditions and procedures as stated
within this division prior to bidding this project.
All work must be in compliance with the Secretary of the Interiors Standards for Treatment of Historic
Properties and Stipulations provided in the Heritage Trust Fund Grant awarded by the Kansas State Historical
Society.
0.3 Location of the Project
202 East Front Street
0.4 Parties Involved in the Project
Owner: City of Waterville, KS.
Architect: Bruce McMillan AIA, Architects, P.A., Manhattan, Kansas
General Contractor: T/B/A
0.5 Instructions to Contractor
Before submitting bids, Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the site and existing structures and make
observations and take such measurements of existing conditions, etc., to obtain a clear understanding of the
work to be performed under this contract. Questions and/or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of
the Architect.
0.6 Temporary Utilities
The Owner will provide temporary water and electricity. The Contractor will provide and pay for a job phone
or cellular/vehicle phone for himself and his sub-contractors. No use of facility phones will be permitted.
Contractor to make temporary connections as required.
0.7 Plans and Specifications
Plans and Specifications are available from the Architect: Bruce McMillan AIA, Architects, P.A., 555 Poyntz
Avenue, Suite 295, Manhattan, Kansas 66502 (785) 776-1011 – Fax (785) 776-9785
[email protected].
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
PAGE 0- 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
0.8 Bond and Insurance Requirements
The Contractor shall take out, pay for, and maintain at all times during the performance of work under the
contract, through companies and agencies approved by the Owner, and containing provisions satisfactory to
the Owner, the following liability insurance and Bonds.
0.8.1 Bonds
In accordance with paragraph 11.4 of the General Conditions, the contractor shall furnish the following
corporate bonds as security for the faithful performance and payment of all his obligations under the
contract documents:
Performance and Maintenance Bond;
Statutory Bond
0.8.1.1 Performance and Maintenance Bond
The contractor shall furnish a Performance and Maintenance Bond, legally issued, meeting the
approval of, and running to the owner, in an amount not less than the total contract price of said
improvements, conditioned upon the prompt, full, and complete performance by the contractor of his
covenants and agreement contained in the contract documents and indemnifying the owner against all
claims, loss, or damage which he may sustain or suffer by reason of any injury to persons or property
occasioned by the action of the contractor or his employees.
Incorporated in the Performance and Maintenance Bond, legally issued and running to the owner,
shall be the condition that the contractor shall maintain and make all repairs to the improvements
constructed by him, at his own expense and free of charge to the owner, for the period of one (1) year
after the date of acceptance of said work by the said owner, any of which repairs may become
necessary within such period by reason of any imperfection of the material used, by reason of any
defective workmanship, or any improper, imperfect, or defective preparation of the ground upon
which any such improvements shall be laid including the correction of any backfill settlement and all
results of backfill settlement.
0.8.1.2 Statutory Bond
The contractor shall furnish a Statutory Bond, legally issued, meeting the approval of the owner and
running to the State of Kansas, in an amount equal to the contract price of said improvements, and
conditioned that the contractor shall pay all indebtedness incurred for labor, supplies, equipment, and
materials furnished in making the improvements called for herein. The Statutory Bond shall be
placed on file with the Clerk of the District Court of the district where the work is located and a
receipt acknowledging such filing shall be delivered to the owner along with the Statutory Bond.
The Bonds required by the contract documents shall be in amounts at least equal to the contract price
and shall be delivered to the owner simultaneously with the execution and delivery of the Agreement
in accordance with paragraph 11.4 of the General Conditions.
PAGE 0- 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
0.8.2 Insurance
In accordance with the applicable paragraphs of Article 11 of the General Conditions, the contractor shall
purchase and maintain throughout the duration of this contract such types of insurance and in such
amounts as may be necessary to protect himself and the interests of the owner.
0.8.2.1 Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability
This insurance shall protect the contractor against all claims under applicable state worker’s
compensation laws. The contractor shall also be protected against claims for injury, disease, or death
of employees which, for any reason, may not fall within the provisions of a workmen’s compensation
law. This policy shall include an “all states” endorsement if available.
The liability limits shall not be less than the following:
Worker’s Compensation
Employer’s Liability
Statutory
$1,000,000.00 Each Person
0.8.2.2 Comprehensive Automobile Liability
This insurance shall be written in comprehensive form and shall protect the contractor against all
claims for injuries to members of the public and damage to property of others arising from the use of
motor vehicles, and shall cover operation on or off the site of all motor vehicles licensed for highway
use, whether they are owned, non-owned, or hired.
Bodily Injury
Property Damage
$1,000,000 Each Person
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
0.8.2.3 Comprehensive General Liability
This insurance shall be written in comprehensive form and shall protect the contractor against all
claims arising out of any act or omission of the contractor or his agents, employees, or subcontractors.
To the extent that the contractor’s work, or work under his direction, may require blasting, explosive
conditions, or underground operations, the comprehensive general liability coverage shall contain no
exclusion relative to blasting, explosion, collapse of buildings, or damage to underground property.
Bodily Injury
Property Damage
$1,000,000 Each Person
$1,000,000 Aggregate
PAGE 0- 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
0.8.3 Builder’s Risk Insurance
The Owner will carry insurance to insure the Builder’s Risk Perils of fire, vandalism, malicious mischief,
wind storm, hail, explosions, riot, riot attending a strike, civil commotion, air craft, vehicles, smoke,
covering the work installed and the building materials at the construction site.
0.8.4 Evidence of Insurance
Before the work is started, the Contractor shall forward to the Architect and the Owner, two copies of a
Certificate of Insurance or Memorandum of Insurance evidencing that all required insurance is in force,
executed by an authorized representative of the insurance company.
The Contractor must certify to the Owner that he has obtained similar Certificates or Memorandum
evidence of insurance from each of its sub-contractors of the same character and in the same amounts as
the Contractor.
0.9 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee and make good without cost to the Owner, any defects, settlement, shrinkage
and other faults in the work arising from improper materials or workmanship, which may appear within (1)
year after the acceptance of the work (except for specific guarantees of another length of time specified
elsewhere) and shall keep in repair for the period free of expense to the Owner. Part or full payment for the
work shall not relieve him in any way of such responsibility.
This guarantee shall not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance due to malicious or careless action
of parties not properly under the Contractor’s control.
0.10 Equipment, Material and Requests for Substitutions
Equipment and material differing from those specified in this specification may be submitted, providing the
bidder clearly states such differences and provided all essential requirements of the specifications are strictly
adhered to. If equipment and material offered under this provision are, in the opinion of the Architect, equal
to or better than those specified, they will be given consideration. Where a statement of such differences is
not made, it will be understood that equipment and material offered will be in strict accordance with the
specification. Any request for deviation must be submitted and approved in writing by the architect seven (7)
days prior to bid date. No substitutions will be made after bids are accepted and contracts are signed. Bidders
are strongly urged to be cognizant of this stipulation and not be offended when non-authorized submittals are
rejected.
0.11 Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion
The Contractor will be required to commence work under this contract within ten (10) days of the Notice to
Proceed, to prosecute said work with faithfulness and energy and to complete the entire work, ready for use in
an expeditious manner. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all activities with the Architect
and Owner and to keep them abreast of the need for access to other areas of the building throughout
construction.
PAGE 0- 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
The time stated for completion shall include final clean up of the premises. It is mutually agreed that the time
for the commencement and completion of the work will materially affect the progress of other work and the
Owner will suffer financial damage in an amount not now possible to ascertain if this work is not completed
on schedule, and in view of these facts, it is agreed that the Owner will withhold from the Contractor, as
liquidated damages and not as a penalty, the sum of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) per day for each calendar
day that the work remains incomplete beyond the date specified by the Contractor for the completion of the
work. If completion of the work to be performed under the terms of this contract is delayed by reasons of
delay in the performance of any work to be performed by the Owner, or other Contractors, and which is
essential to the work performed under this contract, such delay shall not constitute a basis for any claim
against the Owner, but the time of performance will be extended for a period equal to such delay or as
otherwise mutually agreed upon.
0.12 Demolition
0.12.1 General Information
Furnish labor, equipment and materials to complete demolition, removal and/or relocation of items as
indicated on the drawings or specified herein.
0.12.2 Maintaining Traffic
Provide, erect, maintain lights, barriers and the like to protect the public and their safety.
0.12.3 Utility Lines
Utility lines if encountered shall be cut off and capped or modified as required by local codes or utilities.
0.12.4 Protection of Life, Structures and Properties
The Contractor shall be held responsible and/or liable for injury to any life and/or property during the
course of the work. Take precautions to guard against the movement, settlement or collapse of any
buildings, walls, roofs, etc., and repair promptly to original condition, such damage when done.
0.13 Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction
ARTICLE 1
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
a) Supplement Article 1.1, Basic Definitions, as follows:
When a word, such as “approved”, “proper”, “satisfactory”, “equal” and “as directed” is used, it
implies such reference as to the Architect’s specific approval and direction.
“Provide” means furnish and install.
ARTICLE 3
a) Supplement Paragraph 3.15.1 with:
PAGE 0- 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
The Contractor shall replace broken or scratched glass, clean fixtures, remove dust, dirt, spots, marks,
labels, stains, foreign residue and other blemishes from all wall and floor coverings, clean and polish
hardware, clean and polish glass surfaces, and clean screens.
ARTICLE 7
7.3
CHANGES IN THE WORK:
Construction change directives
a. 7.3.6 Delete the words “a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit” and substitute “an
allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6 below”.
b. Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.10 to 7.3:
7.3.10 In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit included
in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:
1. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the
cost.
2. For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, 5 percent of
the amount due the Subcontractor.
3. For each Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that
Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost.
4. For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors,
3 percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.
5. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with
Subparagraph 7.3.6.
6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except
those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a
complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and
materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are
Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500
be approved without such itemization.
END OF SECTION
PAGE 0- 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
1.1 General Requirements of Work
1.1.1 Materials Equipment and Substitution
The intent of these Specifications is to allow ample opportunity for the Contractor to prosecute the work
to his and the Owner’s best advantage, and to permit maximum competition in bidding on standards of
materials and equipment required.
In general, these Specifications identify the required materials and equipment by naming one or more
manufacturer’s brand, model, catalog number, and/or other identification; the first-named manufacturer’s
product used for the basis of design; other name brands considered equivalent. Equivalent manufacturer
brands must furnish products consistent with the specifications for the first named product, as determined
by the Architect. Base proposal shall include only those brands named, except as hereinafter provided.
Where materials or equipment are described but not named, provide required first quality items, adequate
in every respect for the intended use; such items subject to Architect’s approval prior to procurement.
AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT, SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCT BRANDS FOR THOSE
NAMED IN SPECIFICATIONS WILL NOT BE PERMITTED.
Materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be equal or superior to that specified in
construction, efficiency, utility, aesthetic design, and color, as determined by Architect, whose decision
shall be final and without recourse. Physical size of substitution brand shall not be larger than the space
provided for it. Requests must be accompanied by full description and technical data, in two copies,
including manufacturer’s name, model, catalog number, photographs or cuts, physical dimensions,
operating characteristics, and any other information necessary for comparison. SHOULD PROPOSED
SUBSTITUTIONS BE DETERMINED AS NOT MEETING THE SPECIFICATIONS AND
CONTRACTOR HAS USED THIS PRODUCT IN HIS BID, NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION
WILL BE AWARDED FOR CONTRACTOR TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF THESE
SPECIFICATIONS.
1.2 Drawings
Do not scale drawings for dimensions. Accurately lay-out such work from dimensions indicated on
architectural drawings unless such be found in error. Consult Architect for any interpretations concerning
locations of equipment.
Consult drawings for miscellaneous items of each trade and provide same as indicated.
1.3 Shop Drawings
Shop Drawings shall illustrate principal component parts, methods of assembly, mechanical and electrical
connections, accessories, and relationship to the building components. Note listing Page 1–6 of required
Shop Drawing submittals.
1.4 Protection of Work and Property
Transport, handle, store and erect materials in a manner to keep them free from damage.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - SUPPLEMENTAL
PAGE 1- 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Protect work in place, requiring job-finishing, until such finishing has been completed. Dust proof partitions
shall be installed at all openings connecting portions of buildings being worked on adjacent to other areas
when required by construction type.
Protect previously placed work by suitable coverings or other protections during installation of subsequent
work. Clean off any foreign materials accidently deposited on finished surfaces and, where such would stain,
corrode or otherwise disfigure, clean same immediately with material that will not damage finished work.
Where finished floors are subject to damage, suitably cover traffic areas until building acceptance.
1.5 Temporary Equipment
Contractor will provide temporary hoists, ramps, ladders, scaffolding, shoring, bracing and other equipment
required for proper progress of his work and remove same at work completion.
1.6 Tests of Materials
Furnish materials and equipment that have been properly inspected and tested in accordance with accepted
industries standards. Make field or laboratory tests where specified herein, the costs of such being paid for by
Contractor.
Should such tests or visual observation indicate failure of materials or construction to meet requirements of
drawings and/or Specifications, Contractor shall make and pay for additional tests, as directed by Architect,
until compliance has been proven, and should such work fail to comply Contractor shall replace it at his
expense.
1.7 Appropriate Materials and Installations
Before submitting proposal, Contractor, his Sub-contractors and material suppliers observe Drawings and
Specifications and should any material and/or its installation be indicated or specified in a manner not
approved by the material manufacturer, notify Architect and receive his instructions. Failing to do so,
Contractor shall provide other equivalent materials, suitable for the installation, as selected by Architect, or if
not discovered until after installation, Contractor shall replace materials with such other equivalent suitable
and selected materials, and in either event at no added cost to Owner.
1.8 Receiving and Storing Materials
On receipt of materials, check for in-transit damage in ample time to replace any damaged materials prior to
installation time.
Wherever possible deliver materials and equipment to project site in manufacturer’s original packages,
keeping labels intact until final cleaning.
Where items are to be job-assembled, label, tag, mark or otherwise properly identify each component part
until incorporated in building.
PAGE 1- 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Store materials in a manner to prevent deterioration, staining, soiling, and intrusion of foreign materials.
Provide waterproof, well-ventilated enclosures for materials subject to damage by freezing and frost.
Remove from premises and replace with new, any materials showing deterioration or damage.
1.9 Preparation
Properly prepare all work to receive subsequent work or finish. Each sub-contractor shall notify the General
Contractor if any work is unsatisfactory to receive such subsequent work or finish and the General Contractor
shall receive the Architect’s instructions before proceeding.
1.10 Installations
Furnish, apply, install, connect, erect, clean and condition manufactured articles, materials and equipment per
manufacturer’s printed directions, unless otherwise indicated or specified.
Manufacturer’s printed directions must be on job prior to and during installation of materials and equipment.
Provide all attachment devices and materials necessary to secure material together or to other materials and to
secure work of other trades.
Make allowance for ample expansion and contraction for all building components subject to same.
Make field check of actual building dimensions before product installation.
Install materials only when conditions of temperature, moisture, humidity, and condition of adjacent building
components are conducive to achieving best installation results.
In job-assembling, each trade properly cut and fit to make its assemblies fit accurately and cut and fit as
necessary for other trades having work occurring therein. Correct errors in cutting, shop fabrication and
installation. Where necessary to cut into other building components, do so only in a manner not to damage
building structurally nor aesthetically, then repair adjoining parts thoroughly and neatly.
Handle materials in a manner to prevent scratching, abrading, distortion, chipping, breaking or other
disfigurement.
Unless indicated, fabricate and install materials true to line, plumb and level. Leave finished surfaces smooth
and flat or of smooth contour where indicated, free from wrinkles, warps, scratches, dents and other
imperfections.
Provide quality of workmanship not less than the commercially accepted standards of that trade.
Where fabrics, plastics and other such items join, make seams tight, secure and inconspicuous.
Scribe and/or otherwise neatly fit materials to adjoining materials.
Consult Architect for mounting height or position of any unit not specifically located.
PAGE 1- 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Mix no more materials than can be used before materials begin to “set”. Mix no partially “set” batch with
another. Clean tools and appliances prior to mixing materials that can be contaminated.
Conduct work in a manner to avoid injury to previously placed work.
Do not disturb materials requiring curing time until appropriate curing time has transpired.
1.11 Closing-In-Work
Contractor notify his Sub-Contractor, Owner, and all Contractors and Sub-contractors under the Owner, when
he is ready for them to install their portions of the work and see that they comply with any reasonable period
of time. Neither enclose nor cover any piping, wiring, ducts, equipment or other items until proper tests and
inspections have been made by Architect and/or proper authorities.
Notify Architect to inspect any work when placing of subsequent work would prevent observation of previous
work.
1.12 Finishing
Touch-up imperfections in surfaces, paint and other finishes after all contractors and tradesmen have
completed their work.
Clean surfaces using appropriate materials and methods that will thoroughly clean but not damage materials
and their finishes.
1.13 Repairs
Unless Architect grants permission to repair any defective work, remove from project any work not in
accordance with Contract Documents. Permission to repair any such work shall not constitute a waiver of
Architect’s right to require complete removal of defective work if repair operation does not restore quality
and appearance of member or surface to Architect’s satisfaction. If permission is granted, repair according to
Architect’s directions.
1.14 Completed Work
Completed work shall find materials structurally sound, free from scratches, abrasions, distortions, chips,
breaks, blisters, holes, splits or other disfigurement considered as imperfections for the specific material.
Finished installations shall illustrate first-class workmanship. Completed surfaces shall be thoroughly clean
and free from foreign materials and stains.
1.15 Warranties and Lien Waivers
Before being eligible for final payment, Contractor deliver to Owner, through Architect, all manufacturer’s
and special warranties specified for materials, equipment and installations and all lien waivers from himself,
sub-contractors and material suppliers.
PAGE 1- 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
1.16 Required Shop Drawings, Materials, Samples and Tests
Where appropriate, the contractor shall prepare and submit shop drawings, material, samples, and tests in
accordance with the agreements reached during the preconstruction conference.
1. It is the responsibility of the prime Contractor to submit all shop drawings of fabricated work sufficiently
in advance of requirements to afford the Architect ample time for checking, correcting and, if
resubmission is necessary, rechecking. Any pertinent fabricated work is at the Contractor’s risk. No
consideration will be given to shop drawings which do not bear the stamp of the prime contractor
evidencing that he has checked them. Transmittal of shop drawings to the Architect is to be in writing
and any variations from contract requirements are to be described in such writing and subsequently
covered by an approved Change Order. Approvals of shop drawings to be valid must be in writing by the
Architect.
2. Five copies of each shop drawing are to be submitted to the Architect for approval. The same number are
to be furnished if resubmission is required. Three copies of approved drawings or of drawings requiring
correction and resubmission will be returned to the prime Contractor. The Architect will deliver one copy
of approved drawings to the Local Authority when required.
3. Any approval given does not relieve the prime Contractor of the responsibility of executing the work in
accordance with contract terms or of correcting errors.
4. Detailed requirements concerning shop drawings are included in the section of the General Conditions
captioned “SHOP DRAWINGS”.
The following listing of submittals is intended to guide the Contractor as to important items for approval. The
listing, although detailed, should not necessarily be considered complete and all submittals customarily made
either listed or not listed in the following shall be made.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Stone Cleaning & Patching Materials
Membrane Roofing System
Grout Specification
Epoxy Injection
Cap Flashing/Color Chart
Caulking & Sealants
Paint & Paint Products
END OF SECTION
PAGE 1- 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Access to site.
Coordination with occupants.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Miscellaneous provisions.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Waterville Opera House.
1.
B.
Owner: City of Waterville, KS. 136 East Commercial St., Waterville, KS 66548.
1.
C.
Owner's Representative: Ms. Nori Blackburn, City Clerk, (785) 363-2367.
Architect: Bruce McMillan AIA Architects, P.A., 555 Poyntz Ave. Ste 295, Manhattan, KS
66502. (785) 776-1011
1.
1.4
Project Location: 202 East Front Street, Waterville, KS 66548.
Architects Representative: Garric Baker
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1.
SUMMARY
Masonry Cleaning, Tuck Pointing, Patching & Epoxy Injection, structural stone repair,
and partial roof repairs.
011000 - 1
B.
Type of Contract:
1.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform
work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
Limits: Confine construction operations to areas noted on drawings.
Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep streets and entrances serving premises clear
and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not
use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
C.
1.6
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction
operations.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction
operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by
construction operations.
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy portions of the premises during entire
construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner
during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the
Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
1.7
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
SUMMARY
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
011000 - 2
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Weekend Hours: Available.
Early Morning Hours: Available.
Hours for Utility Shutdowns: 72 Hours.
Hours for noisy activity: After 8:00 a.m. and before 8:00 p.m.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Notify Architect & Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Obtain Architect's & Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility
interruptions.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1.
2.
Notify Architect & Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
Obtain Architect's & Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive
operations.
E.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
F.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
1.8
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
1.
2.
3.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD Standard.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
A.
All work shall comply with preservation briefs 1, 2, and 9 and are available through the Kansas
State Historical Society, online at the National Park Service, or the General Services
Administration website at http://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/111718
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1.
B.
Types of allowances include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Lump-sum allowances.
Unit-cost allowances.
Contingency allowances.
1.
2.
1.3
Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have
been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual
materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If
necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances
for testing and inspecting.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A.
At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed
to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 1
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
B.
Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of
allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
C.
Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of
the Work.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
1.7
Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
LUMP-SUM UNIT-COST AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials under allowance
and shall include freight, and delivery to Project site.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor,
installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under
allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum as an item in the schedule of values.
C.
Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or
supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted.
1.
1.8
If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner.
Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A.
Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes that indicate
amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B.
Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment under the
contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are part of the Contract Sum. These
costs include delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner
by Change Order.
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 2
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances.
Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey, measure, or count.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1.
2.
Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what
could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance No. 1: Lump Sum Allowance: Include $10,000 in the base bid for removal of
interior wall surfaces, shoring existing construction in place, and replacing finishes upon project
completion.
1.
Coordinate allowance adjustment with unit-price requirements in Section 012200 "Unit
Prices."
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 3
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Allowance No. 2: Quantity Allowance: Include 500 sq. ft. of face stone removal and
replacement above that required for the base bid with like material and proper profile as
specified in Division 4 in base bid.
1.
Coordinate quantity allowance
Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
adjustment
with
unit-price
requirements
in
C.
Allowance No. 3: Contingency Allowance: Include a contingency allowance of $10,000.00 for
use according to Owner's & Architect’s written instructions.
D.
Allowance No. 4: Tuckpointing Allowance: Include 500 L.F. of tuckpointing above that
required for the base bid as specified in Division 4.
1.
Coordinate quantity allowance adjustment with unit price requirements in Section 012200
“Unit Prices”.
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the
Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of
the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope
of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or
decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
UNIT PRICES
012200 - 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit Price No. 1: Stone removal and replacement with new stone units.
1.
2.
B.
Unit of Measurement: Square foot of stone removed, based on survey of volume
removed.
Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements in
Section 012100 "Allowances."
Unit Price 2: Removal of additional deteriorated mortar and replacement with new mortar.
1.
2.
Unit of Measurement: Linear foot based on survey of volume removed.
Quantity Allowance: Coordinate unit price with allowance adjustment requirements in
Division 01 Section "Allowances."
UNIT PRICES
012200 - 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
Division 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for
substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title
and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use Contractor Form.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
012500 - 1
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
7 days of receipt of request.
a.
b.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
012500 - 2
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 7 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered
or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
012500 - 3
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
012500 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
1.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Office A.S.I.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
012600 - 1
e.
B.
Quotation Form: Use Contractor Form.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use Contractor Standard Form.
ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A.
Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of
allowances.
B.
Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope
of unit-price work.
1.6
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.7
On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order
for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive.
Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for
subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
012600 - 2
1.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
012600 - 3
WATERVILLE OPERA H OUSE STRUCTURAL STONE REPAIRS
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing the handling
and processing of allowances.
Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of
unit prices.
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures
for handling changes to the Contract.
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction
schedule.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.
Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
Submittal schedule.
Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 1
2.
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1)
2)
3)
Labor.
Materials.
Equipment.
4.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents.
5.
6.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
7.
8.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.
Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 2
9.
10.
Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each
purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments
or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
11.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the first of the
month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the
twenty fifth day of the month.
D.
Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form
for Applications for Payment.
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at
time of Application for Payment.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project
acceleration.
Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on-site and items stored off-site.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 3
1.
2.
3.
Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a.
b.
c.
G.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
I.
Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
H.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of values.
Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion
for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously
for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 4
J.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
General coordination procedures.
Coordination drawings.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
A.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
013100 - 1
B.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days prior to of starting construction operations, submit a list
of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at
Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail
addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as
alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,
that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1.
D.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of
the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
013100 - 2
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than
one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.
Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of
various systems and components.
Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings
by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the
information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before
submitting for review.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations
will not be considered changes to the Contract.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
2.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door
floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
013100 - 3
3.
4.
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform
Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.
Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to
requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
a.
C.
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow two working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after
5:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
013100 - 4
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
1.
2.
1.8
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log at pay request intervals..
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions
and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,
including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
013100 - 5
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
4.
C.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Lines of communications.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises and existing building.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for moisture and mold control.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
013100 - 6
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility requirements.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties
requiring information.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days prior to the scheduled date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.
Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project
closeout.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project
and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a.
b.
c.
Preparation of record documents.
Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final
inspection for acceptance.
Submittal of written warranties.
013100 - 7
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
4.
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Requirements for completing documentation.
Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and
for final payment.
Submittal procedures.
Coordination of separate contracts.
Owner's partial occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
1.
2.
3.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Status of documentation.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
013100 - 8
17)
18)
19)
4.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the
meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
F.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction
schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each
coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
2.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
013100 - 9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
013100 - 10
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Startup construction schedule.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Material location reports.
Site condition reports.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise
approved by Architect.
C.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
013200 - 1
E.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
B.
Three paper copies.
Startup construction schedule.
1.
Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of
schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
D.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E.
Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
F.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
013200 - 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final
completion.
1.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times
in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
013200 - 3
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Building flush-out.
Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
Structural completion.
Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1.
F.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
2.2
See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working
hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by
which recovery will be accomplished.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include
skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on
indicated activities.
013200 - 4
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded,
time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice of Award.
a.
2.
3.
4.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract
Time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Mobilization and demobilization.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Utility interruptions.
Installation.
Punch list and final completion.
Activities occurring following final completion.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on
the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval
prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main
subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance
manuals, punch list activities, project record documents.
a.
Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
013200 - 5
E.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
F.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Main events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS
A.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.
Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.
Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
013200 - 6
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project
site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain
of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or
effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are
known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
013200 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
014000 - 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.4
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
014000 - 2
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A.
1.6
Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports when specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
1.7
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
C.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
014000 - 3
b.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
6.
7.
1.8
Build site-assembled mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for
Project.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup as indicated on Drawings.
Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are
required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
B.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, and similar
quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1.
2.
C.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor
by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and
-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
014000 - 4
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Schedule of Inspections: Prepare a schedule of inspections, and similar quality-control services
required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's
construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, and each party involved in
performance of portions of the Work where inspections are required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of inspecting, and similar services, repair damaged construction and
restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas
and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
014000 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
1.
1.3
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in
the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C.
Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is
available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections
and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having
jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention
program.
C.
Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and
construction from water absorption and damage.
015000 - 1
1.
2.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water
absorption or water damage.
Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating
water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil (0.25-mm) minimum thickness,
with flame-spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2.
B.
Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches (914
by 1624 mm).
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1.
2.3
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
015000 - 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering
occupied areas.
B.
Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment
in a condition acceptable to Owner. Coordinate level of use with Owner prior to use as existing
system is marginal.
1.
3.3
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
B.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection.
Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial
Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to
Owner.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C.
Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
D.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
015000 - 3
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. (see
page at end of this section)
2.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
F.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste
from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."
G.
Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1.
3.4
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no
evidence remains of correction work.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and
other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be
removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent
properties and walkways..
D.
Barricades and Warning Signs: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
E.
Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to
protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241;
manage fire-prevention program.
1.
2.
3.5
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations and similar sources of fire ignition according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during
construction.
015000 - 4
B.
Exposed Construction Phase:
1.
2.
3.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Protect porous materials from water damage.
Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,
when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been
delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed
surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
015000 - 5
GENERAL CONTRACTOR (LIST)
BRUCE McMILLAN AIA, ARCHITECTS P.A.
OWNER: CITY OF WATERVILLE, KANSAS
SUPPORTED BY: THE WATERVILLE PRESERVATION SOCIETY
FUNDED IN PART BY A HERITAGE TRUST FUND GRANT
THROUGH THE KANSAS STATE HISTORICAL SOCIETY
WATERVILLE, KANSAS 66548
PROJECT NO. HTF 2015-10 MASONRY & STRUCTURAL STONE REPAIRS
202 EAST FRONT STREET
WATERVILLE OPERA HOUSE IMPROVEMENTS
7”
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other
characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers
named in the specification.
016000 - 1
1.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable
Products" Article.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
B.
1.5
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
016000 - 2
4.
C.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
016000 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or
approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"
Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
Products:
a.
b.
4.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers
and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be
considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will be considered unless otherwise indicated.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
016000 - 4
5.
C.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics
that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable
Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's
decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents,
that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results,
and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
016000 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Construction layout.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Progress cleaning.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions
of the building.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work.
1.4
A.
Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1.
EXECUTION
Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
017300 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance
and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a.
B.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during
interruption of permanent services and systems.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
a.
b.
2.
Lintels
Structural Stone Units.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting
the Work.
1.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
C.
3.2
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
EXECUTION
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
017300 - 4
3.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to
requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
F.
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
EXECUTION
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
017300 - 5
3.
4.
H.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
I.
3.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark
containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
4.
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
EXECUTION
Remove liquid spills promptly.
017300 - 6
2.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,
completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during the construction period.
3.6
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion
construction photographic documentation.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
C.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar
final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections,
including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature
for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust records.
Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design
requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days
prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below
that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements, if any.
Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
3.
4.
5.
D.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of
10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection
or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.
1.8
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project
Manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Contractor/Owner Option: Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and
assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic
PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of
contents at beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous
to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
1.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
C.
3.2
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs.
Clean transparent materials, including glass in doors and windows. Remove
glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1.
2.
3.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Miscellaneous record submittals.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for maintenance manual
requirements.
Division 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents
of the Work in those Sections
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic file of Project's
Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories
of each submittal.
1.
D.
Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordkeeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit
one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.
017839 - 1
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents
concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes,
product selections, and other notations incorporated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide
information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic
documentation.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Actual equipment locations.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
017839 - 2
B.
Owner/Contractor Option: Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for
Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When
authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a.
b.
C.
See Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of
Architect's digital data files.
Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate
layers.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on
cover sheets.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files
that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.
017839 - 3
B.
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy.
1.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and
title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or paper copy.
1.
Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project
record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they
occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
017839 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade
improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
024119 - 1
B.
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.
1.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
A.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner’s on-site operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
B.
Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start
of demolition.
C.
Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
D.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
024119 - 2
1.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is included in Section
020590 for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous
materials are present.
1.
2.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
E.
Historic Areas: Demolition and hauling equipment and other materials shall be of sizes that
clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and openings, including temporary
protection, by 12 inches (300 mm) or more.
F.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
024119 - 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Coordinate with Architect a survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1.
F.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
photographs
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide
photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage
operations.
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
024119 - 4
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1.
3.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices
during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
024119 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Work in Historic Areas: On historic surfaces, the terms "demolish" or "remove" shall mean
historic "removal" or "dismantling" as specified in Section 013591 "Historic Treatment
Procedures."
C.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
3.5
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from
reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove
remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
C.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using hand tools and power-driven saw only when needed, then remove masonry between saw
cuts.
D.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
E.
Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing
and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
1.
2.
Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.
Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
024119 - 6
3.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
1.
2.
3.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
3.8
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE
A.
Existing Construction to Be Removed:
1.
2.
Stone units and window glass/frame/sash components noted on drawings.
Roofing and roof membrane only as required for repair purposes.
B.
Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Window and sash units, scuppers and
downspouts, roofing.
C.
Existing Items to Remain: Stone work and window components noted on drawings.
024119 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 040120.63 - BRICK MASONRY REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Repairing brick masonry, including replacing units.
Removing abandoned anchors.
Painting steel uncovered during the work.
ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowances for brick masonry repair are specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
B.
Preconstruction testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.
C.
Abandoned anchor removal is part of Base Bid.
D.
Brick removal and replacement is part of brick removal and replacement allowance.
E.
Patching masonry units is part of brick masonry patching allowance.
1.4
UNIT PRICES
A.
Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Section 012200 "Unit Prices."
1.
2.
1.5
Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances.
Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change
Orders.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
B.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct from
pointing mortar installed after masonry is set in place.
040120.63 - 1
C.
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Saturation Coefficient: Ratio of the weight of water absorbed during immersion in cold water to
weight absorbed during immersion in boiling water; used as an indication of resistance of
masonry units to freezing and thawing.
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at The Waterville Opera House.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to brick masonry repair including, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.7
Verify brick masonry repair specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed
to make progress and avoid delays.
Materials, material application, sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances.
Quality-control program.
Coordination with building occupants.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Order sand and gray portland cement for colored mortar immediately after approval of
mockups. Take delivery of and store at Project site enough quantity to complete Project.
B.
Work Sequence: Perform brick masonry repair work in the following sequence, which includes
work specified in this and other Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
1.8
Remove plant growth.
Inspect masonry for open mortar joints and point them before cleaning to prevent the
intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
Remove paint.
Clean masonry.
Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent
to masonry repairs along joints.
Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials.
Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed.
Point mortar and sealant joints.
After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final cleaning to
remove residues from this work.
Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry work, delay application of
these chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.
As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in
masonry units according to "Masonry Unit Patching" Article. Patch holes in mortar joints
according to Section 040120.64 "Brick Masonry Repointing."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
040120.63 - 2
1.
2.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes.
Include recommendations for product application and use. Include test data substantiating
that products comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of replacement masonry units on the
structure, showing relation of existing and new or relocated units.
Show provisions for expansion joints or other sealant joints.
Show provisions for flashing, lighting fixtures, conduits, and weep holes as required.
Show locations of scaffolding and points of scaffolding in contact with masonry. Include
details of each point of contact or anchorage.
Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1.
Colored Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample
mortar strips, 6 inches (150 mm) long by 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, set in aluminum or
plastic channels.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Have each set contain a close color range of at least three Samples of different
mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching existing,
cleaned mortar when cured and dry.
Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, gradations, and
source of colored sands from which each Sample was made.
Sand Types Used for Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. (240 mL) of each in plastic screw-top jars.
Patching Compound: Submit sets of patching compound Samples in the form of plugs
(patches in drilled holes) in sample units of masonry representative of the range of
masonry colors on the building.
a.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
mixes of patching compound that matches the variations in existing masonry when
cured and dry.
Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Each type of brick unit to be used for replacing existing units. Include sets of Samples to
show the full range of shape, color, and texture to be expected. For each brick type,
provide straps or panels containing at least four bricks. Include multiple straps for brick
with a wide range.
Each type of patching compound in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches (75 mm) long
by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide. Document each Sample with manufacturer and stock
number or other information necessary to order additional material.
Accessories: Each type of accessory and miscellaneous support.
040120.63 - 3
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
1.10
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Brick Masonry Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry repair
firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service
performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for masonry
repair work.
1.
2.
Field Supervision: Brick masonry repair specialist firm shall maintain experienced fulltime supervisors on Project site during times that brick masonry repair work is in
progress.
Brick Masonry Repair Worker Qualifications: When masonry units are being patched,
assign at least one worker per crew who is trained and certified by manufacturer of
patching compound to apply its products.
B.
Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to
systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use
materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising performance
and preventing damage.
C.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set
quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.
1.
Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry repair work performed.
If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than two adjacent whole units or
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) in least dimension. Construct sample areas in
locations in existing walls where directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated.
Demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work.
Include the following as a minimum:
a.
b.
2.
3.
1.11
A.
Replacement: Four brick units replaced.
Patching: Three small holes at least 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter for each type of
brick indicated to be patched.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on masonry units as follows:
040120.63 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.12
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Provide test specimens as indicated and representative of proposed materials and existing
construction.
Replacement Brick: Test each proposed type of replacement masonry unit according to
sampling and testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour coldwater absorption, five-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of
absorption (suction).
Existing Brick: Test each type of existing masonry unit indicated for replacement
according to testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour coldwater absorption, five-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of
absorption (suction). Carefully remove five existing units from locations designated by
Architect. Take testing samples from these units.
Existing Mortar: Test according to ASTM C 295/C 295M, modified as agreed by testing
service and Architect for Project requirements, to determine proportional composition of
original ingredients, sizes and colors of aggregates, and approximate strength.
Temporary Patch: As directed by Architect, provide temporary materials followed by
permanent repairs at locations from which existing samples were taken.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavyduty cartons and protected against impact and chipping.
B.
Deliver packaged materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers,
labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.
C.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D.
Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if
containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.
E.
Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
F.
Handle masonry units to prevent overstressing, chipping, defacement, and other damage.
1.13
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit brick masonry repair work to be performed according to product
manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.
B.
Temperature Limits, General: Repair masonry units only when air temperature is between 40
and 90 deg F (4 and 32 deg C) and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after
completion of the Work unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair unless
otherwise indicated:
040120.63 - 5
1.
2.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients, masonry
repair materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120
deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), provide enclosure and
heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for seven
days after repair.
D.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repairs when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks, and use cooled materials as required to minimize evaporation. Do not
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing brick masonry (brick, cement,
sand, etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
MASONRY MATERIALS
A.
Face Brick: As required to complete brick masonry repair work.
1.
Brick Matching Existing: Units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture,
size, and shape that match existing brickwork and with physical properties within 10
percent of those determined from preconstruction testing of selected existing units.
a.
2.
Special Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
3.
For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within
units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range and variation rather than
brick that matches an individual color within that range.
Provide molded, 100 percent solid shapes for applications where core holes or
"frogs" could be exposed to view or weather when in final position and where
shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
Provide specially ground units, shaped to match patterns, for arches and where
indicated.
Mechanical chopping or breaking brick, or bonding pieces of brick together by
adhesive, are unacceptable procedures for fabricating special shapes.
Tolerances as Fabricated:
Type FBX.
According to tolerance requirements in ASTM C 216,
040120.63 - 6
B.
Building Brick: ASTM C 62, of same vertical dimension as face brick, for masonry work
concealed from view.
1.
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Grade SW where in contact with earth.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction; white or gray, or both where required for color matching of mortar.
1.
Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according
to ASTM C 114.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
E.
Lafarge North America Inc.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144.
1.
2.
F.
Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.
Essroc.
Hanson Brick and Tile;Lehigh Hanson.
Holcim (US) Inc.
QUIKRETE.
Exposed Mortar: Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as
possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
Mortar Pigments: ASTM C 979/C 979M, compounded for use in mortar mixes, and having a
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Davis Colors.
LANXESS Corporation.
Solomon Colors, Inc.
040120.63 - 7
G.
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Water: Potable.
MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Brick Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured
for patching brick masonry.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the masonry
unit), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than masonry units being
repaired, and develops high bond strength to all types of masonry.
3.
Use formulation having working qualities and retardation control to permit forming and
sculpturing where necessary.
Formulate patching compound in colors and textures to match each masonry unit being
patched. Provide no fewer than three colors to enable matching of the color, texture, and
variation of each unit.
4.
2.5
Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.
Conproco Corporation.
Edison Coatings, Inc.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint
thicknesses and bed depths of masonry units, less the required depth of pointing materials
unless removed before pointing.
B.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material; compatible with mortar, joint primers,
sealants, and surfaces adjacent to joints; and that easily comes off entirely, including adhesive.
C.
Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd
primer according to MPI #23 (surface-tolerant, anticorrosive metal primer).
1.
2.
D.
Surface Preparation: Use coating requiring no better than SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool
Cleaning" surface preparation according to manufacturer's literature or certified
statement.
VOC Limit: Use coating with a VOC content of 400 g/L (3.3 lb/gal.) or less.
Other Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval
of a mockup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved.
Minimal possibility of damaging exposed surfaces.
Consistency of each application.
Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance.
Do not use products or tools that could leave residue on surfaces.
040120.63 - 8
2.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
MORTAR MIXES
A.
Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by
volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in
a clean, mechanical batch mixer.
B.
Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter
specified proportions without Architect's approval.
1.
Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not add pigment exceeding 10
percent by weight of the cementitious or binder materials, except for carbon black which
is limited to 2 percent, unless otherwise demonstrated by a satisfactory history of
performance.
C.
Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mixes: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Volume: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, 1 part
portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and
lime masonry cement or mortar cement.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Property: ASTM C 270, Property Specification, Type N
unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and
lime masonry cement or mortar cement.
Pigmented, Colored Mortar: Add mortar pigments to produce exposed, setting
(rebuilding) mortar of colors required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
A.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove gutters and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to masonry and store during
masonry repair. Reinstall when repairs are complete.
1.
3.2
Cover sills, ledges, and other projecting items to protect them from mortar droppings.
Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and repair work to discourage mortar from
adhering.
Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.
Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building.
MASONRY REPAIR, GENERAL
A.
Appearance Standard: Repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20
feet (6 m) away by Architect.
040120.63 - 9
3.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
ABANDONED ANCHOR REMOVAL
A.
Remove abandoned anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in
use unless indicated to remain.
1.
2.
Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry.
Notify Architect before proceeding if an item cannot be removed without damaging
surrounding masonry. Do the following where directed:
a.
b.
3.
3.4
Cut or grind off item approximately 3/4 inch (20 mm) beneath surface and core
drill a recess of same depth in surrounding masonry as close around item as
practical.
Immediately paint exposed end of item with two coats of antirust coating,
following coating manufacturer's written instructions and without exceeding
manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness per coat. Keep paint off sides of
recess.
Patch hole where each item was removed unless directed to remove and replace masonry
unit.
BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A.
At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated or are to be
reused. Carefully remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding
masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units.
1.
When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward
outside edges.
B.
Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area.
C.
Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged
condition. Coordinate with new flashing, reinforcement, and lintels, which are specified in other
Sections.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose
units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels,
brushes, and water.
Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.
Store brick for reuse. Store off ground, on skids, and protected from weather.
Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner unless otherwise indicated.
Clean masonry surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in
preparation for brick replacement.
040120.63 - 10
HTF 2015-10/15.05
G.
Replace removed damaged brick with other removed brick in good condition, where possible,
or with new brick matching existing brick. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to
usable size.
H.
Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is
required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
1.
2.
I.
Lay replacement brick with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head,
and collar joints. Butter ends with enough mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet
both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption
(suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. (30 g/194 sq. cm per min.) Use wetting methods
that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing
brickwork.
Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets according to Section 040120.64
"Brick Masonry Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of surrounding area.
When mortar is hard enough to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering
with pointing of joints.
Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
hours, including weekends and holidays.
1.
3.5
Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints.
Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.
Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is
unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
PAINTING STEEL UNCOVERED DURING THE WORK
A.
Notify Architect if steel is exposed during masonry removal. Where Architect determines that
steel is structural, or for other reasons cannot be totally removed, prepare and paint it as follows:
1.
2.
B.
3.6
Surface Preparation: Remove paint, rust, and other contaminants according to SSPCSP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning", as applicable to comply with paint manufacturer's
recommended preparation.
Antirust Coating: Immediately paint exposed steel with two coats of antirust coating,
manufacturer's recommended rate of application (dry film thickness per coat).
If on inspection and rust removal, the thickness of a steel member is found to be reduced from
rust by more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), notify Architect before proceeding.
MASONRY UNIT PATCHING
A.
Patch the following masonry units unless another type of repair or replacement is indicated:
1.
Units indicated to be patched.
040120.63 - 11
2.
3.
4.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Units with holes.
Units with chipped edges or corners. Patch chipped edges or corners measuring more
than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.
Units with small areas of deep deterioration. Patch deep deteriorations measuring more
than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension and more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep.
B.
Remove and replace existing patches unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect.
C.
Patching Bricks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.7
Remove loose material from masonry surface. Carefully remove additional material so
patch does not have feathered edges but has square or slightly undercut edges on area to
be patched and is at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, but not less than recommended in
writing by patching compound manufacturer.
Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch extends to edge of masonry
unit.
Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each unit being patched.
Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match.
Rinse surface to be patched and leave damp, but without standing water.
Brush-coat surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Place patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by patching compound
manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more than 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer.
Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface plane
or contour of masonry unit. Shape and finish surface before or after curing, as determined
by testing, to best match existing masonry unit.
Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set.
Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from brick at
edges, and those that do not match adjoining brick in color or texture.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar
and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water applied by
low-pressure spray.
1.
2.
Do not use metal scrapers or brushes.
Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
B.
Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
C.
Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof
and flush gutters and downspouts.
D.
Remove masking materials, leaving no residues that could trap dirt.
040120.63 - 12
3.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Allow inspectors use of lift devices and scaffolding, as needed, to perform inspections.
B.
Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry
out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of
the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of lift devices and
scaffolding, as needed, to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed.
C.
Notify inspectors and Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices
and scaffolding will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until inspectors
have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work areas at lift
device or scaffold location.
3.9
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property.
B.
Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 040120.63
040120.63 - 13
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 040120.64 - BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Repointing joints with mortar.
Repointing joints with sealant.
ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowances for repointing brick masonry are specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
B.
Preconstruction testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.
C.
Repointing masonry is part of brick masonry repointing allowance.
1.4
UNIT PRICES
A.
1.
2.
1.5
Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances.
Orders.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.6
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s).
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at The Waterville Opera House.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to repointing brick masonry including, but not
BRICK MASONRY REPOINTING
040120.64 - 1
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Verify brick masonry repointing specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities
needed to make progress and avoid delays.
A.
Order sand and gray portland cement for pointing mortar immediately after approval of
B.
Work Sequence: Perform brick masonry repointing work in the following sequence, which
includes work specified in this and other Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
1.8
Inspect masonry for open mortar joints and permanently or temporarily point them before
cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall.
Remove paint.
Clean masonry.
Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent
to masonry repairs along joints.
Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials.
Where water repellents are to be used on or near masonry work, delay application of
these chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.
As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in
masonry units according to Section 040120.63 "Brick Masonry Repair." Patch holes in mortar
joints according to "Repointing Masonry" Article.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of repointing work on the structure.
040120.64 - 2
C.
1.
Pointing Mortar: Submit sets of mortar for pointing in the form of sample mortar strips, 6
inches (150 mm) long by 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
D.
mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching existing,
Sand Type Used for Pointing Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. (240 mL) of each in plastic screwtop jars.
Sealant materials.
1.
Each type, color, and texture of pointing mortar in the form of sample mortar strips, 6
inches (150 mm) long by 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a.
2.
3.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Include with each Sample a list of ingredients with proportions of each. Identify
sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand and brand names of
cementitious materials and pigments if any.
Sealant materials.
Accessories: Each type of accessory and miscellaneous support.
A.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing masonry units and mortar.
B.
1.10
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Brick Masonry Repointing Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced brick masonry
repointing firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful inservice performance. Experience in only installing masonry is insufficient experience for
masonry repointing work.
1.
B.
Field Supervision: Brick masonry repointing specialist firms shall maintain experienced
full-time supervisors on Project site during times that brick masonry repointing work is in
progress.
Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written quality-control program for this Project to
systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow methods and use
materials and tools without damaging masonry. Include provisions for supervising performance
and preventing damage.
040120.64 - 3
C.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of brick masonry repointing to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to
set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
1.11
A.
Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, each approximately 36 inches (900
mm) high by 48 inches (1200 mm) wide for each type of repointing required, and repoint
one of the areas.
in writing.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on masonry units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.12
HTF 2015-10/15.05
construction.
Existing Brick: Test each type of existing brick indicated for repointing according to
testing methods in ASTM C 67 for compressive strength, 24-hour cold-water absorption,
five-hour boil absorption, saturation coefficient, and initial rate of absorption (suction).
Carefully remove five existing units from locations designated by Architect. Take testing
samples from these units.
A.
B.
C.
D.
040120.64 - 4
1.13
HTF 2015-10/15.05
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
conditions permit repointing work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written
instructions and specified requirements.
B.
Temperature Limits, General: Repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is between 40
and 90 deg F (4 and 32 deg C) and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after
completion of the Work unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for mortar-joint pointing
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
D.
When air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), heat mortar ingredients and existing
masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), provide enclosure and
heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for seven
days after pointing.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar materials. Provide artificial
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F (32 deg C) and above unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repointing brick masonry (cement, sand,
etc.) from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
cold-weather construction; white or gray, where required for color matching of mortar.
1.
to ASTM C 114.
B.
C.
1.
following:
a.
040120.64 - 5
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
following:
a.
2.
Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend
several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Color: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
G.
2.3
1.
F.
Essroc.
Hanson Brick and Tile;Lehigh Hanson.
Holcim (US) Inc.
QUIKRETE.
1.
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Davis Colors.
LANXESS Corporation.
Water: Potable.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Sealant Materials:
1.
Sealant manufacturer's standard elastomeric sealant(s) of base polymer and
characteristics indicated below and according to applicable requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
a.
2.
3.
B.
Type: Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of mortar adjoining installed
sealant unless otherwise indicated.
Ground-Mortar Aggregate: Custom crushed and ground pointing mortar sand or existing
mortar retrieved from joints. Grind to a particle size that matches the adjacent mortar
aggregate and color. Remove all fines passing the No. 100 sieve.
Joint-Sealant Backing:
040120.64 - 6
1.
2.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended in writing by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible, joint-filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
C.
D.
of a mockup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
MORTAR MIXES
A.
1.
B.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together
before adding any water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
1.
performance.
C.
D.
1.
2.
Pointing Mortar by Volume: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, 1 part portland
cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors
required.
Pointing Mortar by Type: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N unless
otherwise indicated; with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime
040120.64 - 7
3.
masonry cement or
required.
Pointing Mortar by
otherwise indicated;
masonry cement or
required.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
mortar cement. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors
Property: ASTM C 270, Property Specification, Type N unless
with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime
mortar cement. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
A.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove gutters and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to masonry and store during
masonry repointing. Reinstall when repointing is complete.
1.
3.2
Keep wall area wet below pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering.
Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces.
MASONRY REPOINTING, GENERAL
A.
3.3
Appearance Standard: Repointed surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20
feet (6 m) away by Architect.
REPOINTING MASONRY
A.
Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:
1.
2.
3.
All joints in areas indicated.
Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints.
Joints at locations of the following defects:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Holes and missing mortar.
Cracks that can be penetrated 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more by a knife blade 0.027 inch
(0.7 mm) thick.
Cracks 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or more in width and of any depth.
Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object.
Eroded surfaces 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more deep.
Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools.
Joints filled with substances other than mortar.
B.
Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.
C.
Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:
040120.64 - 8
1.
2.
3.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Remove mortar from joints to depth of joint width plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), but not less than
1/2 inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do
not remove unsound mortar more than 2 inches (50 mm) deep; consult Architect for
direction.
Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with
square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or
flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry
units as directed by Architect.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks,
loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Pointing with Mortar:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing
application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If
rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing.
Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater
than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform
depth is formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard before
applying next layer.
After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by
placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm). Fully compact each layer and
allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry
units have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of
masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges
onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.
When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as
demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable.
Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
Pointing with Sealant: Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
After raking out, keep joints dry and free of mortar and debris.
Clean and prepare joint surfaces. Prime joint surfaces unless sealant manufacturer
recommends against priming. Do not allow primer to spill or migrate onto adjoining
surfaces.
Fill sealant joints with specified joint sealant.
a.
b.
Install cylindrical sealant backing beneath the sealant. Where space is insufficient
for cylindrical sealant backing, install bond-breaker tape.
Install sealant using only proven installation techniques that ensure that sealant is
deposited in a uniform, continuous ribbon, without gaps or air pockets, and with
complete wetting of the joint bond surfaces equally on both sides. Fill joint flush
with surrounding masonry and matching the contour of adjoining mortar joints.
040120.64 - 9
c.
Install sealant as recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer but within the
following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead:
1)
d.
e.
f.
G.
3.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Fill joints to a depth equal to joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch (13
mm) deep or less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep.
Tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads, slightly concave. Remove excess
sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Sanded Joints: Immediately after first tooling, apply ground-mortar aggregate to
sealant, gently pushing aggregate into the surface of sealant. Lightly retool sealant
to form smooth, uniform beads, slightly concave. Remove excess sealant and
aggregate from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not allow sealant to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into
the voids of adjoining surfaces, particularly rough textures. Remove excess and
spillage of sealant promptly as the work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by
the means necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to adjoining
surfaces or finishes, as demonstrated in an approved mockup.
Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least
30 days before beginning cleaning work.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar
and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water applied by
low-pressure spray.
1.
2.
B.
Clean adjacent nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
C.
D.
3.5
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
Allow inspectors use of lift devices and scaffolding, as needed, to perform inspections.
B.
040120.64 - 10
C.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Notify inspectors in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding will be relocated. Do
not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until inspectors have had reasonable opportunity to
make inspections and observations of work areas at lift device or scaffold location.
040120.64 - 11
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 040140.61 - STONE REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Repairing stone masonry, including replacing whole and partial units.
Removing abandoned anchors.
Painting steel uncovered during the work.
ALLOWANCES
A.
Stone repairs Section 012100 "Allowances."
B.
Preconstruction testing is part of base bid.
C.
Abandoned anchor removal is part of base bid.
D.
Stone removal and replacement is part of stone removal and replacement allowance and unit
price.
E.
Partial stone replacement (dutchman repair) is part of stone removal and replacement allowance
and unit price.
F.
Crack injection is part of base bid.
G.
Patching stone units is part of base bid.
1.4
UNIT PRICES
A.
1.
2.
Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances and estimated
quantities.
Orders.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 1
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
DEFINITIONS
A.
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm
B.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Mortar used to set and anchor masonry in a structure, distinct from
pointing mortar installed after masonry is set in place.
C.
Rift: The most pronounced direction of splitting or cleavage of a stone.
D.
Stone Terminology: ASTM C 119.
1.6
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House
1.
Review methods and procedures related to stone repair including, but not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.7
Verify stone repair specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
A.
Order sand and gray portland cement for colored mortar immediately after approval of
B.
Work Sequence: Perform stone repair work in the following sequence, which includes work
specified in this and other Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Remove paint.
Clean stone.
Rake out mortar from joints surrounding stone to be replaced and from joints adjacent to
stone repairs along joints.
Repair stonework, including replacing existing stone with new stone.
Where water repellents are to be used on or near stonework, delay application of these
chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 2
C.
1.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in stone
according to "Stone Patching" Article. Patch holes in mortar joints according to
Section 040140.62 "Stone Repointing."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of replacement stone units on the
structure and their jointing, showing relation of existing and new or relocated units.
Show partial replacement stone units (dutchmen).
Indicate setting number of each new stone unit and its location on the structure in
annotated plans and elevations.
Show provisions for flashing and weep holes as required.
Show replacement and repair anchors, including drilled-in pins. Include details of
anchors within individual stone units, with locations of anchors and dimensions of holes
and recesses in stone required for anchors, including direction and angle of holes for pins.
1.
Colored Mortar: Submit sets of mortar that will be left exposed in the form of sample
mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/4 inch, 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic
channels.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Sand Types Used for Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. of each in plastic screw-top jars.
Patching Compound: Submit sets of patching compound Samples in the form of plugs
(patches in drilled holes) in sample units of stone representative of the range of stone
colors on the building.
a.
4.
mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the existing,
mixes of patching compound that matches the variations in existing stone when
cured and dry.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 3
D.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Each type of replacement stone. Include sets of Samples to show full range of color,
texture, grain, veining, and finish to be expected. Provide sets of at least three 12-by-12inch Samples for each type, but no fewer than necessary to indicate full range and
proportion of variations within range.
Each type of patching compound in form of briquettes, at least 3 inches long by 1-1/2
inches wide. Document each Sample with manufacturer and stock number or other
information necessary to order additional material.
Each type of adhesive.
Accessories: Each type of anchor, accessory, and miscellaneous support.
A.
Qualification Data: For stone repair specialist including field supervisors and workers.
B.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing stone and mortar and replacement stone.
C.
1.10
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Stone Repair Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced stone repair firm to perform
work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience in
only installing standard unit masonry or new stone masonry is insufficient experience for stone
repair work.
1.
2.
B.
Field Supervision: Stone repair specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time
supervisors on Project site during times that stone repair work is in progress.
Stone Repair Worker Qualifications: When stone units are being patched, assign at least
one worker per crew who is trained and certified by manufacturer of patching compound
to apply its products
Mockups: Prepare mockups of stone repair to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality
standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation.
1.
Stone Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of stone indicated to have repair work
performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than two adjacent
whole units or approximately 48 inches in least dimension. Construct sample areas in
locations in existing walls where directed by Architect unless otherwise indicated.
Demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work.
Include the following as a minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Replacement: Four stone units replaced.
Partial Stone Replacement: Two partial stone replacements (dutchman repairs).
Stone Plug Repair: Two stone plug repairs for each type of stone indicated to be
plugged.
Crack Injection: Apply crack injection in two separate areas as directed.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 4
e.
2.
3.
1.11
A.
Patching: Three small holes as directed.
in writing.
Preconstruction Testing: Perform preconstruction testing on stone units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.12
HTF 2015-10/15.05
construction.
Existing Mortar: Test according to ASTM C 295/C 295M, modified as agreed by and
Architect for Project requirements, to determine proportional composition of original
ingredients, sizes and colors of aggregates, and approximate strength.
A.
Deliver stone units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty
crates and protected against impact and chipping.
B.
Deliver each piece of stone with code mark or setting number on unexposed face, corresponding
to Shop Drawings, using nonstaining paint.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Handle stone to prevent overstressing, chipping, defacement, and other damage.
1.13
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
conditions permit stone repair work to be performed according to product manufacturers'
written instructions and specified requirements.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Temperature Limits, General: Repair stone units only when air temperature is between 40 and
90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of the Work
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for stone repair unless
1.
2.
When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, repair materials, and
existing stone to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C).
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to
maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for seven days after repair.
D.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect stone repairs when temperature and humidity conditions
produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and patching materials. Provide artificial
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise indicated.
E.
For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for repairing stone (stone, cement, sand, etc.)
from single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
STONE MATERIALS
A.
Stone Matching Existing: Natural building stone of variety, color, texture, grain, veining, finish,
size, and shape that match existing stone and with physical properties as listed below:
1.
Physical Properties for Limestone:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
Compressive Strength: according to ASTM C 170/C 170M.
Modulus of Rupture: according to ASTM C 99/C 99.
Absorption: according to ASTM C 97/C 97.
Bulk Specific Gravity: according to ASTM C 97/C 97.
For existing stone that exhibits a range of colors, texture, grain, veining, finishes, sizes, or
shapes, provide stone that proportionally matches that range rather than stone that
matches an individual color, texture, grain, veining, finish, size, or shape within that
range.
Cutting New Stone: Cut each new stone so that, when it is set in final position, the rift or natural
bedding planes will match the rift orientation of existing stones.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 6
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
1.
to ASTM C 114.
B.
C.
1.
D.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Masonry Cement or Magnolia Mason's Mix
Masonry Cement.
b.
Lehigh Hanson, Inc.; Lehigh Masonry Cement or Lehigh White Masonry Cement.
c.
Quikrete Companies, Inc. (The); Quikrete Masonry Cement.
1.
a.
E.
1.
2.
F.
Exposed Mortar: Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as
possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Colored Mortar: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color
necessary to produce required mortar color.
record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars.
1.
a.
b.
c.
G.
2.4
Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond
Mortar Cement.
Davis Colors, Inc.; True Tone Mortar Colors.
Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
Water: Potable.
MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Stone Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured
for patching stone.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 7
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn M70 Limestone and Sandstone Repair
Mortar.
Conproco Corporation; Mimic or Matrix.
Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45 or Thin-Fill 55.
Use formulation that is vapor and water permeable (equal to or more than the stone),
exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than stone units being repaired,
and develops high bond strength to all types of stone.
Use formulation having working qualities and retardation control to permit forming and
sculpturing where necessary.
Formulate patching compound in colors, textures, and grain to match stone being
patched. Provide sufficient number of colors to enable matching of each piece of stone.
Cementitious Crack Filler: Ultrafine superplasticized grout that can be injected into cracks, is
suitable for application to wet or dry cracks, exhibits low shrinkage, and develops high bond
strength to all types of stone.
1.
a.
2.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jahn M30 #31 or #32 Micro Injection Grout for
Brick and Soft Stone or Jahn M40 Crack Injection Grout.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Stone Repair Anchors and Pins: Mechanical fasteners and pins of Type 304 or Type 316
stainless steel; designed for stone stabilization and pinning stone pieces; matching shape and
size of existing anchors unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Setting Buttons and Shims: Resilient plastic, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses
and bed depths of stone units, less the required depth of pointing materials unless removed
before pointing.
C.
D.
Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd
primer according to MPI #23 (surface-tolerant, anticorrosive metal primer) or SSPC-Paint 20 or
SSPC-Paint 29 zinc-rich coating
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Use coating requiring no better than SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool
Cleaning" surface preparation according to manufacturer's literature or certified
statement.
VOC Limit: Use coating with a VOC content of 400 g/L or less.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 8
E.
of a mockup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
MORTAR MIXES
A.
B.
1.
performance.
C.
D.
1.
2.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar by Volume: Type N. 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, and
6 parts sand.
Pigmented, Colored Mortar: Add mortar pigments to produce exposed, setting
(rebuilding) mortar of colors required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR SPECIALIST
A.
Stone Repair Specialist Firms: Subject to compliance with requirements, firms that may provide
stone repair include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Midcontinental Restoration. Fort Scott, KS.
2. Restoration and Waterproofing Inc. Topeka/Wichita, KS.
3.2
PROTECTION
A.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding stone and other surfaces.
1.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 9
2.
3.
B.
Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and repair work to discourage mortar from
adhering.
Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed stone and other surfaces.
Remove and salvage scuppers and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to stone.
Reinstall when repairs are complete.
1.
3.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
STONE REPAIR, GENERAL
A.
3.4
Appearance Standard: Repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20
feet, away by Architect.
ABANDONED ANCHOR REMOVAL
A.
Remove abandoned anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in
use unless indicated to remain.
1.
2.
Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking stone.
Notify Architect before proceeding if an item cannot be removed without damaging
surrounding stone. Do the following where directed:
a.
b.
3.
3.5
Cut or grind off item approximately 3/4 inch beneath surface and core drill a recess
of same depth in surrounding stone as close around item as practical.
Immediately paint exposed end of item with two coats of antirust coating,
manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness per coat. Keep paint off sides of
recess.
Patch hole where each item was removed unless directed to remove and replace stone
unit.
STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
A.
At locations indicated, remove stone that has deteriorated or is damaged beyond repair.
Carefully remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding stone, in a
manner that permits replacement with full-size units.
B.
Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area.
C.
Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged
condition. Coordinate with new flashing, reinforcement, and lintels, which are specified in other
Sections.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose
units in existing stone or unit masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated
items.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 10
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole stone units as possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels,
brushes, and water.
Remove sealants by cutting close to stone with utility knife and cleaning with solvents.
Store stone for reuse. Store off ground, on skids, and protected from weather.
Deliver cleaned stone not required for reuse to Owner unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Clean stone surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in
preparation for stone replacement.
G.
Replace removed damaged stone with other removed stone in good condition, where possible,
or with new stone matching existing stone, including direction of rift or natural bedding planes.
Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size.
H.
Install replacement stone into bonding and coursing pattern of existing stone. If cutting is
required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut stone with clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Finish edges to blend with appearance of edges of existing stone.
1.
2.
I.
Set replacement stone with rebuilding (setting) mortar and with completely filled bed, head, and
collar joints. Butter vertical joints for full width before setting, and set units in full bed of
mortar unless otherwise indicated. Replace existing anchors with new anchors matching
existing configuration.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing
stonework.
Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets according to Section 040140.62
"Stone Repointing." Point at same time as repointing of surrounding area.
When mortar is hard enough to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering
with pointing of joints.
Curing: Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
1.
3.6
Maintain joint width for replacement stone to match existing joints.
Use setting buttons or shims to set stone accurately spaced with uniform joints.
Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is
unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
PAINTING STEEL UNCOVERED DURING THE WORK
A.
Notify Architect if steel is exposed during stone removal. Where Architect determines that steel
is structural, or for other reasons cannot be totally removed, prepare and paint it as follows:
1.
Surface Preparation: Remove paint, rust, and other contaminants according to SSPCSP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning" as applicable to comply with paint manufacturer's
recommended preparation.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 11
2.
B.
3.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Antirust Coating: Immediately paint exposed steel with two coats of antirust coating,
manufacturer's recommended rate of application (dry film thickness per coat).
If on inspection and rust removal, the thickness of a steel member is found to be reduced from
rust by more than 1/16 inch, notify Architect before proceeding.
PARTIAL STONE REPLACEMENT
A.
Remove defective portion of existing stone unit (backing stone). Carefully remove defective
portion of stone by making vertical and horizontal saw cuts at face of backing stone and
removing defective material to depth required for fitting partial replacement (dutchman).
1.
2.
3.
Make edges of backing stone at cuts smooth and square to each other and to finished
surface; essentially rectangular. Make back of removal area flat and parallel to stone face.
Do not overcut at corners and intersections. Hand trim to produce clean sharp corners
with no rounding and no damage to existing work to remain.
If backing stone becomes further damaged, remove damaged area and enlarge partial
replacement as required.
B.
Remove mortar from joints that abut area of stone removal to same depth as stone was removed.
Remove loose mortar particles and other debris from surfaces to be bonded and surfaces of
adjacent stone units that will receive mortar by cleaning with stiff-fiber brush.
C.
Cut and trim partial replacement to accurately fit area where material was removed from
backing stone. Fabricate to size required to produce joints between partial replacement and
backing stone of no more than 1/16 inch in width, and to produce joints between partial
replacement and other stones that match existing joints between stones. Cut partial replacement
so that, when it is set in final position, natural bedding planes will match the orientation of
bedding planes of the backing stone unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Pinning: Before applying adhesive, prepare for mechanical anchorage consisting of 1/4-inchdiameter, threaded stainless-steel pins set into 1/4-inchdiameter holes drilled at a 45-degree
downward angle through face of partial replacement and into backing stone. Center and space
pins 3 to 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches into
backing stone and 2 inches into partial replacement with end countersunk at least 3/4 inch
from exposed face of partial replacement.
E.
Concealed Pinning: Before applying adhesive, prepare for concealed mechanical anchorage
consisting of 1/4-inch-diameter, threaded stainless-steel pins set into 1/4-inchdiameter holes
drilled into backing stone and into, but not through, the partial replacement. Center and space
pins 3 to 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches into
backing stone and 2 inches into partial replacement, but no closer than 3/4 inch from exposed
face of partial replacement.
F.
Apply stone-to-stone adhesive if required according to adhesive manufacturer's written
instructions. Coat bonding surfaces of backing stone and partial replacement, completely filling
all crevices and voids.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 12
HTF 2015-10/15.05
G.
Apply partial replacement while adhesive is still tacky and hold securely in place until adhesive
has cured. Use shims, clamps, wedges, or other devices as necessary to align face of partial
replacement with face of backing stone.
H.
Clean adhesive residue from exposed surfaces and patch chipped areas and exposed drill holes
as specified in "Stone Patching" Article.
3.8
STONE PLUG REPAIR
A.
Remove cylindrical piece of damaged stone by core-drilling perpendicular to stone surface.
B.
Prepare a replacement plug by core-drilling replacement stone. Use a drill sized to produce a
core that will fit into hole drilled in damaged stone with only minimum gap necessary for
adhesive. Cut and install plug so that, when it is set in final position, natural bedding planes will
match the orientation of bedding planes of the backing stone unless otherwise indicated.
C.
instructions. Coat bonding surfaces of existing stone and plug, completely filling all crevices
and voids.
D.
Apply plug while adhesive is still tacky and hold securely in place until adhesive has cured.
E.
Clean adhesive residue from exposed surfaces.
3.9
STONE-FRAGMENT REPAIR
A.
Carefully remove cracked or fallen stone fragment indicated to be repaired. Reuse only stone
fragment that is in sound condition.
B.
Remove soil, loose particles, mortar, and other debris or foreign material from fragment
surfaces to be bonded and from parent stone where fragment had broken off, by cleaning with
stiff-fiber brush.
C.
Pinning: Before applying adhesive, prepare for mechanical anchorage consisting of 1/4-inch(6-mm-) diameter, threaded stainless-steel pins set into 1/4-inchdiameter holes drilled at a 45degree downward angle through face of fragment and into parent stone. Center and space pins
between 3 and 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches
into parent stone and 2 inches into fragment with end countersunk at least 3/4 inch from
exposed face of fragment.
D.
Concealed Pinning: Before applying adhesive, prepare for concealed mechanical anchorage
consisting of 1/4-inchdiameter, threaded stainless-steel pins set into 1/4-inchdiameter holes
drilled into parent stone and into, but not through, the fragment. Center and space pins between
3 and 5 inches apart and at least 2 inches from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches into parent
stone and 2 inches into fragment, but no closer than 3/4 inch from exposed face of fragment.
E.
instructions. Coat bonding surfaces of fragment and parent stone, completely filling all crevices
and voids.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 13
HTF 2015-10/15.05
F.
Fit stone fragment onto parent stone while adhesive is still tacky and hold fragment securely in
place until adhesive has cured. Use shims, clamps, wedges, or other devices as necessary to
align face of fragment with face of parent stone.
G.
Clean adhesive residue from exposed surfaces and patch chipped areas and exposed drill holes
as specified in "Stone Patching" Article.
3.10
CRACK INJECTION
A.
General: Comply with cementitious crack-filler manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Drill 1/4-inchdiameter injection holes as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Transverse Cracks Less Than 3/8 inch Wide: Drill holes through center of crack at 12 to
18 inches o.c.
Transverse Cracks More Than 3/8 inch Wide: Drill holes through center of crack at 18 to
36 inches o.c.
Delaminations: Drill holes at approximately 18 inches o.c. both vertically and
horizontally.
Drill holes 2 inches deep.
C.
Clean out drill holes and cracks with compressed air and water. Remove dirt and organic matter,
loose material, sealants, and failed crack repair materials.
D.
Place plastic injection ports in drilled holes and seal face of cracks between injection ports with
clay or other nonstaining, removable plugging material. Leave openings at upper ends of cracks
for air release.
E.
Inject cementitious crack filler through ports sequentially, beginning at one end of area and
working to opposite end; where possible, begin at lower end of injection area and work upward.
Inject filler until it extrudes from adjacent ports. After port has been injected, plug with clay or
other suitable material and begin injecting filler at adjacent port, repeating process until all ports
have been injected.
F.
Clean cementitious crack filler from face of stone before it sets by scrubbing with water.
G.
After cementitious crack filler has set, remove injection ports, plugging material, and excess
filler. Patch injection holes and surface of cracks as specified in "Stone Patching" Article.
3.11
A.
STONE PATCHING
Patch the following stone units unless another type of repair or replacement is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Units indicated to be patched.
Units with holes.
Units with chipped edges or corners. Patch chipped edges or corners measuring more
than 3/4 inch in least dimension.
Units with small areas of deep deterioration. Patch deep deteriorations measuring more
than 3/4 inch in least dimension and more than 1/4 inch deep.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 14
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Remove and replace existing patches unless otherwise indicated or approved by Architect.
C.
Remove deteriorated material and remove adjacent material that has begun to deteriorate.
Carefully remove additional material so patch does not have feathered edges but has square or
slightly undercut edges on area to be patched and is at least 1/4 inch thick, but not less than
recommended in writing by patching compound manufacturer.
D.
Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch extends to edge of stone unit.
E.
Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each stone unit being patched. Combine
one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match.
F.
Brush-coat stone surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's
G.
Place patching compound in layers as recommended in writing by patching compound
manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of each
layer to provide a key for next layer.
1.
2.
Simple Details: Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and
surrounding surface plane or contour of the stone. Shape and finish surface before or after
curing, as determined by testing, to best match existing stone.
Carved Details: Build patch up 1/4 inch above surrounding stone, and carve surface to
match adjoining stone after patching compound has hardened.
H.
Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set.
I.
Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges,
and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture.
3.12
A.
FINAL CLEANING
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stone surfaces of excess mortar and
foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by
low-pressure spray.
1.
2.
B.
Clean adjacent nonstone surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
C.
D.
3.13
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 15
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
B.
Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding
will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project
representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work
areas at lift device or scaffold location.
3.14
STONE WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess stone materials are Contractor's
property.
B.
Stone Waste: Remove stone waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
STONE REPAIR
040140.61 - 16
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 040140.62 - STONE REPOINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Repointing joints with mortar.
Repointing joints with sealant.
ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowances for repointing stone are specified in Section 012100 "Allowances."
B.
Repointing stonework is part of repointing stonework allowance and base bid.
1.4
UNIT PRICES
A.
1.
2.
1.5
Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by estimated quantities.
Orders.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm .
B.
Rift: The most pronounced direction of splitting or cleavage of a stone.
1.6
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to repointing stonework including, but not
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 1
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Verify stone repointing specialist's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to
make progress and avoid delays.
A.
Order sand and gray portland cement for pointing mortar immediately after approval of
Samples. Take delivery of and store at Project site enough quantity to complete Project.
B.
Work Sequence: Perform stone repointing work in the following sequence, which includes work
specified in this and other Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
1.8
Remove paint.
Clean stone.
Rake out mortar from joints surrounding stone to be replaced and from joints adjacent to
stone repairs along joints.
Repair stonework, including replacing existing stone with new stone.
Where water repellents are to be used on or near stonework, delay application of these
chemicals until after pointing and cleaning.
As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in stone
according to Section 040140.61 "Stone Repair." Patch holes in mortar joints according to
"Repointing Stonework" Article.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and locations of repointing work on the structure.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 2
C.
1.
Pointing Mortar: Submit sets of mortar for pointing in the form of sample mortar strips, 6
inches long by 1/4 inch 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
D.
mixes of colored sands and cements that produce a mortar matching the existing,
Sand Type Used for Pointing Mortar: Minimum 8 oz. of each in plastic screw-top jars.
Sealant materials.
1.
Each type, color, and texture of pointing mortar in the form of sample mortar strips, 6
inches long by 1/4 inch 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels.
a.
2.
3.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Include with each Sample a list of ingredients with proportions of each. Identify
sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand and brand names of
cementitious materials and pigments if any.
Sealant materials.
Accessories: Each type of anchor, accessory, and miscellaneous support.
A.
Qualification Data: For stone repointing specialist including field supervisors and workers.
B.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For existing stone and mortar.
1.10
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Stone Repointing Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced stone repointing firm to
perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance.
Experience in only installing standard unit masonry or new stone masonry is insufficient
experience for stone repointing work.
1.
B.
Field Supervision: Stone repointing specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time
supervisors on Project site during times that stone repointing work is in progress.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of stone repointing to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set
quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Repointing: Rake out joints in two separate areas, as indicated for each type of
repointing required, and repoint one of the areas.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 3
2.
3.
1.11
A.
in writing.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Perform preconstruction testing on stone units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.12
HTF 2015-10/15.05
construction.
Existing Stone: Test each type of existing stone indicated for repointing according to
ASTM C 170/C 170M for compressive strength, wet and dry, perpendicular and parallel
to rift; ASTM C 99/C 99M for modulus of rupture, wet and dry, perpendicular and
parallel to rift; and ASTM C 97/C 97M for absorption and bulk specific gravity.
Carefully remove five existing stones from locations designated by Architect. Take
testing samples from these stones.
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.13
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
conditions permit repointing work to be performed according to product manufacturers' written
instructions and specified requirements.
B.
Temperature Limits, General: Repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is between 40
and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least seven days after completion of the Work
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 4
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for mortar-joint pointing
unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients and existing stone to
produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to
maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for seven days after pointing.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar materials. Provide artificial
apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for stone repointing (cement, sand, etc.) from
single source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
1.
to ASTM C 114.
B.
C.
1.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Masonry Cement, Magnolia Buff, Dark &
Ultra Dark Masonry Cement, Magnolia Mason's Mix Masonry Cement, Trinity
White Masonry Cement.
Lehigh Hanson, Inc.; Lehigh Masonry Cement or Lehigh White Masonry Cement.
Quikrete Companies, Inc. (The); Quikrete Masonry Cement.
1.
a.
Lafarge North America Inc.; Lafarge Mortar Cement or Magnolia Superbond
Mortar Cement.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 5
E.
1.
2.
F.
Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend
several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
Color: Natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
record of satisfactory performance in stone mortars.
1.
a.
b.
c.
G.
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Davis Colors, Inc.; True Tone Mortar Colors.
Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments.
Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors.
Water: Potable.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Sealant Materials:
1.
Sealant manufacturer's standard elastomeric sealant(s) of base polymer and
characteristics indicated below and according to applicable requirements in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." To be installed at juncture of stone and door/window
heads/jambs/sills and at base of walls at pavement areas.
a.
2.
3.
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of mortar adjoining installed
sealant unless otherwise indicated.
Ground-Mortar Aggregate: Custom crushed and ground pointing mortar sand or existing
mortar retrieved from joints. Grind to a particle size that matches the adjacent mortar
aggregate and color. Remove all fines passing the No. 100 sieve.
Joint-Sealant Backing:
1.
2.
C.
Type: Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended in writing by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible, joint-filler
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material; compatible with mortar, joint primers,
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 6
D.
of a mockup:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
MORTAR MIXES
A.
1.
B.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together
before adding any water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that retains its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not
retemper or use partially hardened material.
1.
performance.
C.
D.
1.
Pointing Mortar by Volume: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, 1 part portland
cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors
required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPOINTING SPECIALIST
A.
Stone Repointing Specialist Firms: Subject to compliance with requirements, firms that may
provide stone repointing include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Mid Continental Restoration, Fort Scot, KS.
2. Restoration Waterproofing Co. Inc., Topeka/Wichita, KS.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 7
3.2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PROTECTION
A.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding stone and other surfaces.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Remove scuppers and downspouts and associated hardware adjacent to stone and store during
stone repointing. Reinstall when repointing is complete.
1.
3.3
Keep wall area wet below pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering.
Immediately remove mortar splatters in contact with exposed stone and other surfaces.
STONE REPOINTING, GENERAL
A.
3.4
Appearance Standard: Repointed surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20
feet; away by Architect.
REPOINTING STONEWORK
A.
Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent:
1.
2.
3.
All joints in areas indicated.
Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints.
Joints at locations of the following defects:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Holes and missing mortar.
Cracks that can be penetrated 1/4 inch or more by a knife blade 0.027 inch (0.7
mm) thick.
Cracks 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth.
Hollow-sounding joints when tapped by metal object.
Eroded surfaces 1/4 inch or more deep.
Deterioration to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools.
Joints filled with substances other than mortar.
B.
Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.
C.
Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup:
1.
2.
3.
Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2-1/2 times joint width, but not less than 3/4 inch
(20 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Do not
remove unsound mortar more than 2 inches (50 mm) deep; consult Architect for
direction.
Remove mortar from stone surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square
backs and to expose stone for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush
joints to remove dirt and loose debris.
Do not spall edges of stone units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged stone units
as directed by Architect.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks,
loose stone, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Pointing with Mortar:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
F.
Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing
application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If
rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing.
Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater
than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is
formed. Fully compact each layer, and allow it to become thumbprint hard before
After deep areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point joints by
placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to
become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing stone has worn or
rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of stone to avoid
widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed
stone surfaces or to featheredge the mortar.
When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as
demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by
brushing.
Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive
Hairline cracking within mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable.
Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
Pointing with Sealant: Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
After raking out, keep joints dry and free of mortar and debris.
Clean and prepare joint surfaces. Prime joint surfaces unless sealant manufacturer
recommends against priming. Do not allow primer to spill or migrate onto adjoining
surfaces.
Fill sealant joints with specified joint sealant.
a.
b.
c.
Install cylindrical sealant backing beneath the sealant. Where space is insufficient
for cylindrical sealant backing, install bond-breaker tape.
Install sealant using only proven installation techniques that ensure that sealant is
deposited in a uniform, continuous ribbon, without gaps or air pockets, and with
complete wetting of the joint bond surfaces equally on both sides. Fill joint flush
with surrounding stonework and matching the contour of adjoining mortar joints.
Install sealant as recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer but within the
following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead:
1)
d.
Fill joints to a depth equal to joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch deep or
less than 1/4 inch deep.
Tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads, slightly concave. Remove excess
sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 9
e.
f.
G.
3.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Sanded Joints: Immediately after first tooling, apply ground-mortar aggregate to
sealant, gently pushing aggregate into the surface of sealant. Lightly retool sealant
to form smooth, uniform beads, slightly concave. Remove excess sealant and
aggregate from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not allow sealant to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into
the voids of adjoining surfaces, particularly rough textures. Remove excess and
spillage of sealant promptly as the work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by
the means necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage, without damage to adjoining
surfaces or finishes, as demonstrated in an approved mockup.
Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing stone, allow mortar to harden at least 30
days before beginning cleaning work.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stone surfaces of excess mortar and
foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, applied by
low-pressure spray.
1.
2.
B.
Clean adjacent nonstone surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
C.
D.
3.6
A.
B.
Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding
will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project
representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make inspections and observations of work
areas at lift device or scaffold location.
STONE REPOINTING
040140.62 - 10
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
1.
1.3
Stone masonry adhered to unit masonry backup.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for concealed flashing.
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar and other items involving color selection.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
1.5
For each stone type indicated. Include at least five Samples in each set, and show the full
range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work.
For each color of mortar required. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of
pigments used.
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required
to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
044313.16 - 1
1.
C.
Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from
the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect approves such deviations
in writing.
Material Test Reports:
1.
2.
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Stone Test Reports: For each stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified
testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, other than
abrasion resistance, according to referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing
done within previous three years.
Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, indicating
that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone
fitters.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1.
2.
Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
Build mockups for each type of stone masonry in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200
mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup
construction and accessories.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
Include stone coping at top of mockup.
Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in mockup.
Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of
mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit stone masonry above
half of flashing).
Include wood studs, sheathing, building paper or wrap, drainage material, and
flashing in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup.
Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
in writing.
A.
Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's
standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants.
044313.16 - 2
1.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
B.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
C.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry
when construction is not in progress.
1.
B.
Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone
masonry face.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.10
A.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter, using coverings spread
on the ground and over the wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by
frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1.
D.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides, and hold cover
securely in place.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
seven days after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
COORDINATION
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of flashing and
similar items to be built into stone masonry.
044313.16 - 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain stone,from single quarry, whether specified in this Section
or in another Section of the Specifications, with resources to provide materials of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each
cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or
producer.
C.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and
from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding."
2.2
LIMESTONE
A.
Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 568/C 568M.
B.
Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1.
C.
2.3
Limestone matching existing in color and density.
Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic
effects.
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
cold-weather construction; natural color or white cement may be used as required to produce
mortar color indicated.
1.
Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to
ASTM C 114.
B.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Essroc.
Holcim (US) Inc.
Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
Mutual Materials Co.
044313.16 - 4
D.
1.
following:
a.
E.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Davis Colors.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
Lanxess Corporation.
Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement, hydrated lime, and
mortar pigments. Mix shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from
manufacturer's standard colors. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by
weight.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
H.
Essroc.
Holcim (US) Inc.
National Cement Company, Inc.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of
satisfactory performance in stone masonry mortar.
1.
G.
1.
F.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Holcim (US) Inc.
Mutual Materials Co.
Colored Masonry Cement Mix: Packaged blend of masonry cement and mortar pigments. Mix
shall produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard
colors. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
1.
following:
044313.16 - 5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
I.
2.
3.
For pointing mortar, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm)
sieve.
White Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
Colored Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound
stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
a.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Boiardi Products Corporation; a QEP company.
Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.
Bostik, Inc.
C-Cure.
Custom Building Products.
Laticrete International, Inc.
MAPEI Corporation.
Parex USA, Inc.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
L.
Match Architect's sample.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
1.
K.
Essroc.
Holcim (US) Inc.
National Cement Company, Inc.
Aggregate: ASTM C 144 and as follows:
1.
J.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.
Sonneborn Products.
Water: Potable.
044313.16 - 6
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold-rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq.
ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere.
Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal
flashing.
Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with
ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar
bond.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Cheney Flashing Company.
Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated
to receive counterflashing.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge where indicated. Fabricate by extending
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop indicated. Fabricate by bending metal
back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior wall face and down into joint 3/8 inch (10
mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal
flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form
hem on upper surface of metal, so that completed seam will shed water.
Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
Metal Sealant Stops: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall and out to exterior wall face. At exterior wall face, bend metal back on itself for 3/4
inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant
backer rod.
Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
Flexible Flashing: For flashing unexposed to the exterior, use one of the following unless
1.
Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt
between two layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in
masonry.
044313.16 - 7
a.
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2.
3.
Advanced Building Products Inc.
Dayton Superior.
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
Phoenix Building Products.
York Manufacturing, Inc.
Asphalt-Coated Copper Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet coated with
flexible asphalt. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated,
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm).
a.
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
4.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Advanced Building Products Inc.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
Dayton Superior.
Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.
Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.
Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
Polyguard Products, Inc.
Williams Products, Inc.
Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a
polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy as follows:
a.
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
d.
DuPont.
Hyload, Inc.
Mortar Net Solutions.
Monolithic Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Self-Adhesive Sheet: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025 inch (0.64 mm)
thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberized-asphalt adhesive.
Self-Adhesive Sheet with Drip Edge: Elastomeric thermoplastic flashing, 0.025
inch (0.64 mm) thick, with a 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick coating of rubberizedasphalt adhesive. Where flashing extends to masonry face, rubberized-asphalt
coating is held back approximately 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from edge.
1)
Color: Gray.
044313.16 - 8
e.
5.
Accessories: Provide preformed corners, end dams, other special shapes, and
seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer.
EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer,
complying with ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
a.
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
C.
4.
2.
3.
2.5
Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond wall face, use metal flashing.
Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at wall face, use metal
flashing with a drip edge.
Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
1.
E.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
Firestone Specialty Products.
Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and
remain watertight.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flexible Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene.
B.
Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
Wicking Material: Absorbent rope, made from UV-resistant synthetic fiber, 1/4 to 3/8
inch (6 to 10 mm) in diameter.
Mesh Weep Holes: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full width of
head joint and 2 inches (50 mm) high by thickness of stone masonry; in color selected
from manufacturer's standard.
044313.16 - 9
a.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
of the following:
1)
2)
CavClear/Archovations, Inc.
Mortar Net Solutions.
C.
Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m), self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying
with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).
D.
Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032, fabricated into 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) hexagonal-shaped mesh
with minimum 0.0510-inch- (1.3-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel wire.
E.
Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933, fabricated into 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) mesh with
minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel wire.
F.
Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations
indicated.
2.6
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry
surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended
use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.7
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a division of Sandell Construction Solutions.
Dominion Restoration Products.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
PROSOCO, Inc.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated.
1.
B.
Cut, Split, or Select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including
details on Drawings and pattern specified in "Setting Stone Masonry" Article.
1.
C.
For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."
Shape stone specified to be laid in three-course, random range ashlar pattern with sawed
beds.
Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Shape beds to fit supports.
044313.16 - 10
HTF 2015-10/15.05
D.
Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports.
E.
Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
1.
Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.
F.
Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. (522 sq. cm) in area.
G.
Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:
1.
H.
Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Finish: Natural cleft.
Finish for Sills: Rock face (pitched face) with tooled (boasted) washes.
Finish for Lintels: .
Finish for Copings: Rock face (pitched face), front and back; tooled (boasted) top.
a.
2.8
Finish exposed ends of copings same as front and back faces.
MORTAR MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not use calcium chloride.
Use masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious and aggregate materials together
before adding water. Then mix again, adding only enough water to produce a damp,
unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this
dampened condition for one to two hours. Add remaining water in small portions until
mortar reaches required consistency. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final mixing; do
not retemper or use partially hardened material.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1.
2.
D.
Mortar for Setting Stone: Type S.
Mortar for Pointing Stone: Type N.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
044313.16 - 11
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Cement-Paste Bond Coat: Mix either neat cement and water or cement, sand, and water to a
consistency similar to that of thick cream.
1.
For latex-modified portland cement, setting-bed mortar, substitute latex admixture for
part or all of water, according to latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, 5 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
G.
Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 7 parts loose
damp sand, and enough water to produce a workable consistency.
H.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by weight.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and
natural color or white cement as necessary.
1.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
stone masonry.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
SETTING STONE MASONRY
A.
Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1.
Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight
and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
044313.16 - 12
2.
3.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make edges
straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry fabricated.
Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split.
B.
Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable
for intended use.
C.
Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated, random lengths, and
uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as indicated.
D.
Arrange stones in broken-range ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random lengths, and
uniform joint widths.
E.
Arrange stones in three-course, random-range ashlar pattern with random course heights,
random lengths (interrupted coursed), and uniform joint widths.
F.
Arrange stones in polygonal (mosaic) pattern with uniform joint widths.
G.
Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
H.
Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and
other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately
in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and
indicated tolerances.
I.
Maintain uniform joint widths, except for variations due to different stone sizes and where
minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less
than 3/8 inch (10 mm) at narrowest points or more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) at widest points.
J.
Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1.
2.
Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
Sealing joints are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
K.
Install metal expansion strips in sealant joints at locations indicated. Build flanges of expansion
strips into masonry by embedding in mortar between stone masonry and backup wythe. Lap
each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures
with horizontal expansion joints if any.
L.
Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to
downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1.
2.
At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up sheathing face at least 8
inches (200 mm), and behind weather barrier.
At multiwythe masonry walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a
minimum of 8 inches (200 mm), and extend into or through inner wythe to comply with
requirements in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
044313.16 - 13
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
M.
2.
3.
Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches (300 mm) above
finish-grade elevations.
Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below grade.
Allow cementitious dampproofing formulations to cure before setting dampproofed
stone. Do not damage or remove dampproofing in the course of handling and setting
stone.
Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate, including above shelf angles and at
flashing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a minimum of 8
inches (200 mm), and insert in reglet. Reglets are specified in Section 076200 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6 inches
(150 mm) into masonry at each end.
At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches (100 mm) at ends.
At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end
dams.
Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for
application indicated.
Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn
flashing down to form a drip.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from exterior wall face, and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from exterior wall face, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
Cut flexible flashing flush with wall face after completing masonry wall construction.
Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows:
1.
N.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Use wicking material to form weep holes.
Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
Space weep holes 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with exterior wall face after mortar has
set.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm
in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more. For
external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4
inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2 inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more.
044313.16 - 14
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or 1/2
inch in 40 feet (13 mm in 12 m) or more.
C.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20 feet
(13 mm in 6 m) or 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more.
D.
Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average
plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.
E.
Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.
F.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for
thickness of stone.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
A.
Install flashing over sheathing and behind building paper or wrap and drainage material by
fastening through sheathing into framing.
B.
Install lath over building paper or wrap and drainage material by fastening through sheathing
into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063.
C.
Install lath over unit masonry and concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063.
D.
Install scratch coat over metal lath 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick to comply with ASTM C 926.
E.
Coat backs of stone units and face of masonry backup with cement-paste bond coat, then butter
both surfaces with setting mortar. Use sufficient setting mortar, so a slight excess will be forced
out the edges of stone units as they are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space
between units and masonry backup.
F.
Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) before
setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
3.6
POINTING
A.
Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.
Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing
mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep until a uniform depth is formed.
B.
Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch
(10 mm) deep. Compact each layer thoroughly, and allow to it become thumbprint hard before
C.
Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the
following joint profile:
1.
Joint Profile: Match existing profile surrounding area of repair.
044313.16 - 15
3.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
Defective joints.
Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
B.
Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.8
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA
Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A.
Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
B.
Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or soilcontaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in greatest dimension.
Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry
waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
044313.16 - 16
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Framing with dimension lumber.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Wood furring and grounds.
Wood sleepers.
Utility shelving.
Plywood backing panels.
Section 061600 "Sheathing" for sheathing, subflooring, and underlayment.
Section 061753 "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from dimension
lumber.
Section 313116 "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood
framing.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.
B.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5
inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
061053 - 1
3.
4.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
A.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Post-installed anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is
representative of the material tested.
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
each piece omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by
grading agency.
Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.
061053 - 2
2.2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, mezzanine level and walls. Use Category UC3b for
exterior construction not in contact with ground, and surrounding area as well as roofing.
1.
2.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations
shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect
finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each
piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions:
following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Construction or No. 2 Construction, of any of the
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Other Framing: No. 2 Construction or No. 2 Construction, of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
061053 - 3
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 Standard, of any of the following species:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
Utility shelving.
Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and
grades:
1.
2.
Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
D.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
061053 - 4
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, as appropriate for the substrate.
1.
2.
2.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or
A4).
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Galvanized-Steel
Sheet:
Hot-dip,
zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1.
C.
sheet
complying
with
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
1.
2.7
steel
Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
1.
D.
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
KC Metals Products, Inc.
Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
USP Structural Connectors.
Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
B.
Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6
mm).
061053 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and
similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C.
Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
F.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately
fitted to close furred spaces.
Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire
blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks
of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness.
Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space
below partitions.
Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.
G.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
H.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1.
2.
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
061053 - 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
I.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
J.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
K.
3.2
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings.
ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
C.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact
thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board or Plaster Lath: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm
actual-) size furring vertically at 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough
carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
061053 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 064800 - WOOD FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Exterior frames and jambs.
Interior frames and jambs.
Shop priming wood frames and jambs.
Shop finishing wood frames and jambs.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including and finishing materials and processes.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other
Sections.
Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings.
Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
2.
D.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
Shop-applied opaque finishes.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300
mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
Lumber with shop-applied opaque finish, 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300
mm) long for, for each finish system and color, with one-half of exposed surface finished.
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 1
1.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of product.
C.
Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
1.6
Build mockups of typical wood frames as shown on Drawings.
A.
1.7
Do not deliver wood frames until operations that could damage wood frames have been
completed in installation areas. If wood frames must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Field Conditions" Article.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior wood frames only
when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one
coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
B.
Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames
until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
C.
Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood frames
until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity
between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.
D.
Field Measurements: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1.
E.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support wood frames by
field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where wood frames are indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where wood frames are to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wood frames can be supported and
installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD FRAMES, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of wood frames indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
1.
2.2
The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those
selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
EXTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Ponderosa pine Ponderosa pine or sugar pine Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or
western white pine.
2.3
INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.
2.4
WOOD MATERIALS
A.
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 3
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
(75 mm) wide.
Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Materials: 10 to 15 percent.
Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 5 to 10 percent.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of wood frame and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,
Grade M-2, except for density.
a.
of the following:
1)
2)
C.
Environ Biocomposites Manufacturing LLC.
Sorm Incorporated.
Water-Repellent Preservative Treated Materials: Comply with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or
vacuum-pressure treatment) for exterior wood frames indicated to receive water-repellent
preservative treatment.
1.
2.
3.
2.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Preservative Chemicals: 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate (IPBC), combined with an
insecticide containing chloropyrifos (CPF).
Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect
finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated
material.
Extent of Water-Repellent Preservative Treatment: Treat all exterior wood frames unless
otherwise indicated.
A.
Exterior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative
treated, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
1.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
a.
b.
c.
Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
B.
Interior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
C.
Nails for Exterior Use: hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
D.
Screws for Exterior Use: hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel.
E.
Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by metal-framing
manufacturer.
F.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate wood frames to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1.
Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition wood frames to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B.
Before installing wood frames, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete
work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install wood frames to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble wood frames and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
C.
Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
D.
Scribe and cut wood frames to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged
finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing
screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1.
F.
For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood frames. Fill nail
holes with matching filler where exposed.
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 5
1.
G.
3.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces
where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
Refer to Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and for final finishing of installed wood frames not
indicated to be shop finished.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective wood frames, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace wood frames. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B.
Clean wood frames on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
WOOD FRAMES
064800 - 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,
joints, and seams to provide leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.4
A.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,
equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, and condition of
other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.
Review requirements for insurance and certificates.
Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
B.
and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
076200 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location
in Project.
Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of
fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
Include details of termination points and assemblies.
Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing
direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
Include details of special conditions.
Include details of connections to adjoining work.
Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
A.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B.
Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
C.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and
trim installation.
076200 - 2
1.10
A.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
WARRANTY
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and
profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Recycled Content of Steel-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus onehalf of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint
sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
2.2
Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
1.
2.3
Nonpatinated Exposed Finish: Mill.
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as
076200 - 3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
b.
c.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
C.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2
inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
E.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
G.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.4
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A.
Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing
for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to
provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on
exterior face to receive counterflashing with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of
same metal as flashing.
1.
Galvanized Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
a.
076200 - 4
1)
2)
B.
Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking
Thruwall Flashing.
Sandell Manufacturing; Pre-Formed Metal Flashing.
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure interlocking of
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior
face, of same metal as reglet.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
b.
7.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick
Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top
edge.
Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials,
special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of
reglet section ends.
Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.
Accessories:
a.
2.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.
Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.
Finish: Mill With manufacturer's standard color coating.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners
on faces exposed to view.
076200 - 5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1.
2.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D.
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,
and solder.
G.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.6
ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Downspouts: Reinstall downspouts to existing locations with hangers to match existing.
B.
Parapet Scuppers: Reinstall parapet scuppers to existing locations; flash into existing or repaired
roof to match existing conditions
C.
Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of
dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim,. Fabricate from
the following materials as shown on drawings:
1.
2.7
Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
1.
2.
3.
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
076200 - 6
B.
2.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressuretreated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.
2.
C.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where
flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of
corner or intersection.
1.
2.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
076200 - 7
1.
2.
G.
Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pre-tinning where pretinned surface would show in completed Work.
1.
2.
2.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Do not use torches for soldering.
Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
2.10
General: Reinstall existing sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage
system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances
specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
2.11
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean
finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain
sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
E.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
076200 - 8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Non-staining silicone joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
A.
1.4
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Waterville Opera House
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified testing agency
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
C.
Preconstruction Laboratory Test Schedule: Include the following information for each joint
sealant and substrate material to be tested:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Joint-sealant location and designation.
Manufacturer and product name.
Type of substrate material.
Proposed test.
Number of samples required.
Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:
1.
2.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation are needed for adhesion.
E.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
F.
Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
G.
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.7
Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated
to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods
specified in this Section.
A.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates as follows:
1.
2.
3.
1.8
Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to
joint substrates during testing.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
When joint substrates are wet.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
3.
4.
1.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or
replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Non-staining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.
B.
Silicone, Non-staining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Non-staining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, non-traffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1.
a.
b.
c.
2.2
May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.; Bondaflex
Sil 290 FPS-NB or Bondaflex Sil 290 NB.
Pecora Corporation; 890FTS/TXTR or 890 NST.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
a.
b.
c.
2.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
Sealant Backing Material, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems.
Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)
Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the
preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application
indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing
optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.4
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
B.
3.2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Concrete.
Masonry.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Metal.
Glass.
Porcelain enamel.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
C.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and
replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
a.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1.
Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.
Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of
product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion
complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new
sealant contacts original sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
B.
3.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
3.7
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants
immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
Joint Sealant: Silicone, non-staining, S, NS, 50, NT.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockups for the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
Each texture finish indicated.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
1.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
National Gypsum Company.
United States Gypsum Company.
2.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
3.
Long Edges: Tapered.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a.
3.
4.
2.5
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
3.2
HTF 2015-10/15.05
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in
area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing when shown: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
Wood Framing when shown: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal
corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension
lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide
control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
Type X: As indicated on Drawings Vertical: surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
B.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a.
b.
3.
4.
C.
3.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with
no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until
fastening adhesive has set.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated by Architect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
L-Bead: Use where indicated.
U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
1.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
3.6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on minimal exterior
substrates that may have been disturbed during construction.
1.
1.3
Wood.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E.
F.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 1
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified,
with the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
3.
4.
1.7
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
in writing.
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 2
1.8
HTF 2015-10/15.05
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint
category indicated.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C.
VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
2.3
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 3
2.4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
METAL PRIMERS
A.
2.5
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.
WOOD PRIMERS (CONTRACTORS CHOICE)
A.
Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood: MPI #5.
B.
Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: MPI #7.
2.6
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
2.7
Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
2.8
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying
paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 4
HTF 2015-10/15.05
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
F.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with
SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by
mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of
subsequently applied paints.
H.
Wood Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended
in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 5
4.
3.3
HTF 2015-10/15.05
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door
frames.
Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient
difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 6
HTF 2015-10/15.05
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Quick-Drying Enamel System:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81.
Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, doors, windows.
1.
Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, oil for exterior wood, MPI #7.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #11.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
B.
1.
1.3
Wood.
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint
systems on exterior substrates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
E.
F.
G.
Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
3.
4.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
in writing.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
1.7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1.
2.
1.8
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Pratt & Lambert.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
C.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
E.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
2.4
Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
2.5
Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1.
2.
3.
Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If
paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at
Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces
painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials
from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two
paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
1.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Wood: 15 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
D.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
Wood Substrates: (Also reference Division 8, 86100)
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 5
5.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint
manufacturer's written recommendations.
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
Wood Substrates: Including windows.
1.
Alkyd System:
a.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
c.
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
Alkyd over Latex Primer System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.
Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 7
HTF 2015-10/15.05
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for recording preexcavation and
earth moving progress.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and
support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
C.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in
the Work.
Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet
(9 m) in length.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 1
HTF 2015-10/15.05
E.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and
electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the
ground surface.
F.
Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix
asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete
pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
G.
Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
H.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4
A.
1.5
Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during earth moving operations.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or
B.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth moving operations.
C.
Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures, specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls," Section 311000
"Site Clearing," are in place.
D.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
Foot traffic.
Erection of sheds or structures.
Impoundment of water.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 2
7.
E.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS (as required)
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
C.
Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
D.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
E.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
F.
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
(37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
G.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.
H.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.
I.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm)
thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 3
5.
B.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Green: Sewer systems.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150
mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,
with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal
detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving
operations.
B.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary
protection before placing subsequent materials.
3.2
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1.
3.3
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
EXPLOSIVES
A.
3.4
Explosives: Do not use explosives.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil
materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 4
1.
2.
3.5
HTF 2015-10/15.05
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Remove rock only if encountered to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of
permanent construction.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
D.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.6
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation
of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when
approved by Architect.
1.
3.7
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by
Architect.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
3.8
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 5
B.
3.9
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.10
A.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
3.11
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm)in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12
inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95
percent.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below
subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85
percent.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 6
3.12
A.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1.
2.
B.
3.13
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
C.
HTF 2015-10/15.05
Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested
with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.14
A.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and
recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 7